JP2019166079A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving the operability of operation means.SOLUTION: A movable range of a board box A4100 is set in a range from a first position (a position shown in a broken line in Fig. 123(b)) disposed on a back face side of an inner frame 12 to a second position where a front face of a box cover 4200 faces vertically upward (an arrow U direction). Thereby, in the second position, an operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, a release side (opposite to a second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to a side where an operator is present, and the operability of a switch device A120 and a key device A130 can be improved. On the other hand, in the first position, the front face of the operation wall portion A210 can face a back face of another component disposed on the inner frame 12. Thus, unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 123

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-205029

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operation means is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operability of the operating means.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a container that accommodates an object, and includes an operation means that is disposed on the object and is operable. The container is formed to be displaceable, and can be displaced to a position where the operation means can be operated more easily than a position where the container is arranged at the time of playing.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the container is pivotally supported in a rotatable manner and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the container has a separate member facing the operation means at a position where the container is disposed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the product cost can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to suppress the manipulation means from being illegally operated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIIa-XIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIIIa-XIIIa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIV-XIV line | wire of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. (A) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, (c) is a front view of an operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XXIa-XXIa line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a launch effect unit. (A) is a side view of the 1st light irradiation apparatus in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, (b) is a side view of the 2nd light irradiation apparatus in the arrow L direction view of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and launch unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. (A) to (f) is a plan view of a linear motion member, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. (A) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. (A) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. As the front transmission member and the rear transmission member rotate, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar projection of the transmission arm member FIG. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion / contraction unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of an expansion / contraction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of an expansion / contraction displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member and the shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of an expansion / contraction displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an effect member. It is a rear view of a production member. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the LXXXIII-LXXXIII line of FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of the path | route formation member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and a decoration means. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and an operation unit taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2. It is the elements on larger scale of the 1st decoration member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the expansion / contraction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. It is sectional drawing of the game board and launch unit in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a substrate box. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate box, (b) is a side view of a board | substrate box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a back perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of a box base, (b) is a rear perspective view of a box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a front view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), (b) is a side view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb of FIG. 114 (a), FIG. 114C is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXIVc in FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state where the key is operated to the off position, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state where the key is operated to the on position. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115 (b). is there. FIG. 115A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 115A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 116A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116A, and FIG. 116B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the board | substrate box in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the board | substrate box in sectional line CXXIb-CXXIb of Fig.121 (a). (A) is a front view of the board | substrate box in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the board | substrate box in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)) on the back side (or front side).

  The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  The state change between the opened state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate that is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end portion and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing up toward the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is connected to the game area and the second game hole. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 by closing the space between the two winning ports 640.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed, Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that is visible through the center portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the second prize opening 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or in the time short, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball launched to the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

  Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80. For example, the through gate 67 may be on the left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be lower than the first winning opening 64 in front view, or may be on the left side of the left and right center of the game area.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a is present. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball passes through the left side (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim to win the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or second by “left-handed” It is also possible to aim at the winning port 640. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning port 64 cannot be aimed by “right-handed”, and the ball fired by “left-handed” does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding a game that changes the way the ball is hit.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, it may be the lower right side of the first winning port 64, the lower left side of the first winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. .

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a has a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate part 513 is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted to a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b that can be inserted through the fastening screws.

  By positioning the positioning convex portion 513a in the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the base plate 60 is screwed. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be fixed integrally, the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 (in this embodiment, circular or oval) may be used, and the fitting gap is large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (a smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As described above, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. Center frame 86 configured in shape, ball flow down unit 150 configured to allow balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) toward the front side of third symbol display device 81 It is configured by assembling a launching effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the inner frame 12 in a manner in which it is disposed opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

  The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive resin material, and is configured to make it easy for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, irrespective of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

  For example, even when the ball flow-down unit 150 is provided on the back side of the base plate 60, the base plate 60 can be seen through and the back side can be seen, so that the sphere flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball descending unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect produced by the visually recognized sphere, which will be described in detail later.

  In addition, when there is a part which you do not want to show to a player, what is necessary is just to cope with sticking a sealing member with low light transmittance (or light non-transmission).

  The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The firing effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 that divides the range in which the granular member 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed in the center frame. It is possible to fire toward the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 to effectively recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. it can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed therein. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 disposed symmetrically on the inner left and right sides of the rear case 510. Is provided.

  Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 at the position above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed at the left and right positions of the opening 511a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in time series. 7 shows the expansion / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state, and in FIG. 8, the expansion / reduction unit 600 in the overhang state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state are shown. In FIG. 9, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state are shown.

  Also, FIG. 10 shows an expansion / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state, and in FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state and the right displacement rotation unit. The unit 800 is in the effect lower end state.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap in front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the production standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, The state change from the production standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in front view. Can be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (allowing the front and rear positions to overlap).

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be able to be displaced downward in a state where the production members 700 are collectively arranged at one place, and in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the downward displacement. The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the position, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in front view is increased (see FIG. 9).

  After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 gather again (see FIG. 8), move up and dispose in a state of being arranged in one place, and return to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

  The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the stand-by state in a direction having a horizontal component as well as a vertical component.

  In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc part S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing / retreating path part S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc part S1a.

  In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right lateral slide members 840 are disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a. In FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a. The horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

  Therefore, when the left side slide member 840 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 11 and the right side slide member 840 is displaced upward, it is as if the side slide member 840 is in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if it is rotationally displaced around the center point C1 arranged closer to the center.

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the production freedom degree of the production using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

  12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are the same as FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIV-XIV in FIG.

  7 and 9, the game board 13 is not shown, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show a state where the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

  12A and 13A show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward. In FIGS. 12B and 13B, the granular member 320 is fired and scattered. An example of this state is shown.

  In the production standby state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the production member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged such that the central portion of the collective arrangement is arranged above the division member 310 of the firing production unit 300. Through 310, a large part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible.

  On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B, the effect member 700 is disposed in the vicinity of the partition member 310 of the launch effect unit 300 and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible.

  Since the displacement trajectory of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the partition member 310 do not interfere with each other, the firing effect unit 300 is set so as to execute the operation effect of firing the granular member 320 on the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

  As shown to Fig.12 (a), the granular member 320 is arrange | positioned below the lower edge of the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, and is fired by the path | route which inclines as it goes ahead. It is struck against the front wall of the partition member 310 and rises while rebounding in the range formed by the partition member 310.

  Thereby, since the granular member 320 can be shown to the player as if it comes toward the player's side, the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

  In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought to the player side, and the components such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to avoid a low degree of freedom in arrangement.

  In other words, as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is fired toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment, a position directly below the partition member 310 or a front position may be employed. However, in this case, since the launch effect unit 300 is disposed in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure a space for providing a guide path for flowing a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. It becomes difficult and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to cope with it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 310 is arranged at the forefront position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged obliquely rearward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning port 64 can be secured. It is possible to arrange the guide route of the sphere without any problem, and to prevent the situation where the first winning port 64 cannot be arranged freely.

  If the control which discharges the granular member 320 in the state shown to Fig.12 (a) is performed, as shown in FIG.12 (b), the granular member 320 scattered within the division member 310 and the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of FIG. It is possible to show the player together with the display in the display area. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize combining a planar display and the motion of the granular member 320 displaced in three dimensions.

  When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13A, the scattering of the granular member 320 inside the partition member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 are performed as shown in FIG. You can show the player together with the change. In this case, for example, the granular member 320 on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 whose state changes is obtained by combining the timing of the scattering of the granular member 320 and the timing of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 being displaced in a discrete manner. Can be visually recognized, and the force of changing the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

  Here, as a method of effecting together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is also conceivable.

  However, as in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to produce the effect effectively.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms the range in which the granular member 320 that produces the operation effect along with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 scatters is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, even when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 covers most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

  Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming difficult to see compared to the case where the granular member 320 is configured with a large member.

  Therefore, even when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 covers most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

  Further, the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

  That is, in the displacement rotation unit 800, as with the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7), Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed between the state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the effect lower end state, the effect upper end state, see FIGS. 10 and 11), The effect of visually recognizing the dispersed granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the dispersed granular member 320 and the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotating unit 800 are performed. be able to.

  In this case, although the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has been described as being able to produce an effect effectively by scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the displacement in a manner in which the effect member 700 is dispersed, the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. The particulate member 320 is scattered in accordance with the rotation of the wing member 854 disposed in the air flow, so that an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing member 854 (the wing member 854 becomes so large that an air flow is generated). It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at a high speed, and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800. And can be used for both.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330 that is a part of the launch effect unit 300 and is disposed directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the advance / retreat path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid a collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the launch effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 The degree of freedom of setting can be improved, and it is configured to be able to move upwardly beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are disposed close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space is arranged so that a space can be secured between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310, but until the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 is secured until the transport. It is not a consideration. Therefore, at the time of conveyance, it is desirable that the effect member 700 is maintained at the upper end position of the displacement range, and the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 are restricted so as not to be disposed close to each other.

  Returning to FIG. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510. The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back surface of the rear case 510, and restricts the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from being displaced downward from the effect standby state in the restricting state.

  By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, shipment and conveyance of the pachinko machine 10 can be facilitated.

  In detail, conventionally, means for suppressing the displacement of the movable accessory by, for example, filling a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) into the range in which the movable accessory is displaced, and extracting the cushioning material after reaching the game hall. As a result, the movable accessory may be prevented from being displaced during shipment or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no through portion for extracting the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 If it is not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be extracted, and there is a possibility that the burden on the game hall will be great.

  As a countermeasure, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in the present embodiment. Thus, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be changed between the restriction state for restricting the up-and-down displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the restriction release state for releasing the restriction without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the back case 510. Can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

  15A is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15B is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15C is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. FIG.

  15A and 15B illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in a restriction release state, and FIG. 15C illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in a restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched between the regulated state and the regulated release state when the cylindrical portion 183 d protrudes and appears from the contact member 181. In the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d extends to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to be engageable with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

  16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18 (a) is a rear view of the contact member 181. FIG. 18B is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18C is a front view of the operation member 183.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 disposed in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a contact member disposed on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 that is guided in displacement by the guide member 182, and the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. And a coil spring 184 that is configured to be capable of applying a biasing force toward the back side to the operation member 181.

  As the operation member 183 is formed from a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that house the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view.

  The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the back side. The wall portion is extended, and the back surface is formed in a double cylindrical shape having a shape in which a coil spring 184 can be arranged in a gap and an insertion hole 181a through which a fastening portion that is drilled at the left and right end portions and protrudes from the rear case 510 is inserted. A cylindrical holding portion 181b that protrudes to the side and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a known latch mechanism in relation to the operation member 183 and that can be engaged with the operation member 183 are provided.

  The guide member 182 is a screw into which an oval annular main body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted through the insertion hole 181a are inserted. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw inserted into the contact member 181 is screwed, a retaining portion 182d projecting radially inward at the rear side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. And a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower inner portions.

  From this configuration, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, but can not be detached. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by the setting of the fastening direction.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the back case 510). Therefore, in a state where the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the back case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only in a state where the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

  Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 is inserted from the back side of the guide member 182 into the screw insertion part 182b, the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). The displacement regulating device 180 can be easily removed from the back case 510.

  The operation member 183 has an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with a rear view outer shape and opened on the front side, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. A flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the groove portion, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d projecting in a cylindrical shape from the center of the bottom of the main body portion 183a to the front side, and a cylinder thereof An arcuate ridge portion 183e projecting from the front side with an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 with the portion 183d as the center, and a position engageable with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181 And an engaging portion 183f that can configure a known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

  An elliptical seal is attached to the back surface of the operation member 183. This seal has a concave shape on one end in the short direction (see Fig. 15 (a)), and by placing this concave shape upwards, it is easy to prevent vertical posture errors when assembling. can do.

  By making the main body 183a elliptical, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operation member 183 is likely to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by contacting the main body 182a of the guide member 182.

  The flange portion 183b is formed larger in rear view than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. That is, the operation member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction in a state where the flange portion 183 b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182.

  The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 and has a role of smoothly performing the longitudinal displacement of the operation member 183. In this embodiment, the protrusion 182e is formed at two locations on the upper side and at one location on the lower side, so that the groove portion 183c is also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly caused by making the operating member 183 upside down.

  The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be shared by a portion that restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

  The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is disposed so as to be opposed to the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is disposed to face the large-diameter cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped protruding portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portion, so that the load generation area can be increased and locally large. It is possible to prevent a load from occurring.

  The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is not circular but is formed in an arc shape in which the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. Thereby, it can avoid that the engaging part 183f, the cylindrical part 183d, and the coil spring 184 are separated too much.

  A state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased to the back side by a coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed to the front side against this biasing force, the operating member 183 is configured by an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is actuated and pushed in at least the minimum stroke at which the latch mechanism acts, the state is switched alternately between the restriction state and the restriction release state.

  As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the above-mentioned minimum, not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated, but by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a risk that the displacement regulating device 180 will change its state unintentionally.

  For example, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, if the state of the displacement restricting device 180 is changed unintentionally due to an impact at the time of shipment or vibration at the time of transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state (the effect member 700). May be displaced from the state of being arranged at the upper displacement end. When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is disposed close to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 is subjected to the impact at the time of shipment or the vibration at the time of transportation, and the effect member 700 is divided into the partition member of the launch effect unit 300. There is a possibility of colliding with 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position (a position eccentric to the right side) away from a position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operation member 183, and the operation member The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

  Thereby, since the attitude | position of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined previously, the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

  The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

  In FIG. 21A, the restriction state of the displacement restriction device 180 is illustrated, and in FIG. 21B, the restriction release state of the displacement restriction device 180 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the open / close base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator can reach out by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Configured to be touched. Since this position is on the opposite side to the side (opening / closing tip side, right side) where the worker who performs work with the inner frame 12 opened, the displacement regulating device is not intended by the operator when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the above-described latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operation member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load that pushes the operation member 183 is used to move the operation member 183 back and forth, and is also used to change the posture of the operation member 183.

  For example, when the right side of the operation member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side sufficiently moves back and forth, a situation may occur in which the position of the operation member 183 changes and the left side is not pushed in sufficiently.

  Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement restricting device 180 and switching the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the displacement restricting device 180 to generate the necessary displacement by pushing the formation portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side and controls the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint.

  Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed toward the pushing side. Therefore, it can be configured that the operator's pushing load is easily transmitted to the operation member 183 as the pushing amount increases.

  In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict the displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from changing.

  Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction about the front-rear direction axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front-rear direction) are orthogonal, the operation member 183 from the transmission gear 650 applies a load in the displacement direction. It can be prevented from receiving. Accordingly, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without the latch mechanism forming portion having a strong configuration.

  Thus, since the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by setting the displacement regulating device 180 to the regulated state, the application of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of conveyance. For example, the maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800 described later can be safely and easily performed by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement restriction device 180 being in a restricted state during maintenance after installation in the gaming machine store.

  That is, when the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is maintained during the maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 is erroneously operated, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement regulating device 180, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are prevented from colliding with each other. Can do.

  If the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricted state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the restricted release state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21B). Thereby, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can execute an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

  Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and looked into from the open front end side (right side), so that the displacement regulating device 180 is in a regulation release state. It is explained that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed in front of the shape part of the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510. The operating member 183 is hidden behind the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the restriction release state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed so as to protrude from the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 to the back side. The operation member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side.

  Therefore, the worker can slightly check the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 without fully opening the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as a confirmation work before turning on the power. It is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in a deregulated state by visually recognizing that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right and looking in from the right side.

  In the present embodiment, since the back case 510 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and the operation member 183 is formed from a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

  Here, a case will be described in which the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21A) and the power is turned on. . In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) indicates that the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has not changed during the operation of power supply. The position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  By showing this position detection error display to the clerk of the gaming machine store, it can be noticed that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. This error display is displayed by detecting the presence / absence of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm relating to the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is obtained using the position detection error display that is normally provided in the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without preparing a program for additional error display or display material. Can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, while the power is turned on, the push-in operation of the operation member 183 is disabled, and it is required to turn off the power supply, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation member 183 may be operated even when the power is turned on.

  Moreover, the structure which makes pushing operation of the operation member 183 impossible cannot be set arbitrarily. For example, the push-in operation may be disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 so that the transmission gear 650 is displaced. In the middle, the rear surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front-rear direction to limit the displacement of the operation member 183.

  As a different situation, an example in which the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 matches the cylindrical portion 183d in the front-rear direction.

  For example, during maintenance, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes to the restricted state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is disposed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance is completed and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is limited, and by performing error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. This can be notified to the clerk of the gaming machine store, details will be described later.

  Thereby, even if a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is not provided separately, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be executed either before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, not only the inner frame 12 but also the work of opening the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12 is required. It is preferable to operate the device 180 in advance.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the firing effect unit 300, the partition member 310 is disposed to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state. That is, it is possible to execute an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

  Since the partition member 310 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player who visually recognizes the range surrounded by the center frame 86 can be viewed. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular member 320 are overlapped for visual recognition.

  FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inward of the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forms a box shape having an open bottom, and the partition member 310 A plurality of granular members 320 disposed inside the member 310 so as to be displaceable, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop from the partition member 310, and the partition members The 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 arrange | positioned on the right side of 310, and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 arrange | positioned on the left side of the division member 310 are provided.

  The partition member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion disposed on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And a bottom plate portion in parallel relation with the front plate portion 311 on the back side of the front plate portion 311, and has a blocking wall extending to the front side so as to close the gap from the left and right and the top of the bottom plate portion. It is integrally formed under the back surface partition part 313 and the back surface partition part 313, and communicates with an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) configured between the front plate part 311 and the back surface partition part 313. A back section lower portion 314 whose path can be configured with the curved plate portion 312 and a deformed through section 315 formed through the back section lower portion 314 are provided.

  Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is approximately the same as the size of the partition member 310 in front view. It is formed to become. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

  Thereby, the structural member for concealing the edge part of the light-guide plate 161 can be shared by the use which conceals the edge part of the division member 310. FIG. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not necessary, and the edge of the partition member 310 is displayed by being overlapped with the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Therefore, the visibility of display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular member 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular member 320 is scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is very large for a powerful production. There is a need to do more. Therefore, if it is formed as a narrow space to some extent, a powerful effect can be executed by making a small number of granular members 320 visible with high density.

  On the other hand, if the space is too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left and right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear partition lower portion 314. Therefore, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration at the time of injection, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened.

  Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are disposed closer to the back partition lower portion 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b is compared with the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right center portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in can be narrowed.

  That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 is in the internal space IE1. It is possible to easily reach the vicinity of the central portion. Thereby, the granular member 320 can be easily made visible to the player.

  In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. This allows the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 as if it exploded from around the center of the internal space IE1 and scattered in all directions. Can be improved.

  The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in this embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to incline downward toward the back side and to incline downward toward the left and right center.

  As a result, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is lowered and displaced by its own weight can be displaced downward toward the back side while being moved toward the left and right central side.

  Further, the degree of the downward inclination in the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured such that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the back side. Thereby, as the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause the displacement toward the left and right center side in preference to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, the granular member 320 stays (clogs) in the middle of the downward displacement as the granular member 320 tends to be displaced to the back side at the left and right end positions where the granular member 320 is likely to be dense due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the degree of the downward inclination toward the back side in the left and right central part 312b of the curved plate part 312 is abrupt compared to the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central side in the left and right part 312a of the curved plate part 312. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the granular member 320 is crowded in the middle of the flow.

  On the other hand, the back section lower portion 314 has a plate portion opposed to the back side of the curved plate portion 312 that is substantially the same as the left and right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with a slant angle of an aspect in which the distance from the left and right central portion 312b becomes wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear partition lower part 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) as the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that injects the granular member 320.

  Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the back partition lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the back partition lower portion 314 is made substantially uniform. can do.

  The deformed penetrating part 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and a short part that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long part that curves and extends to the left and right in a manner that connects the upper ends of the short parts. Is provided. The penetration direction is formed so as to be inclined obliquely upward as it goes from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower part 314 (see FIG. 12A). Thereby, the acute angle part of the back surface partition lower part 314 (the lower part of the deformed penetrating part 315 in FIG. 12A) constituting the deformed penetrating part 315 is not opposed to the injection direction of the granular member 320.

  Thereby, since the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion at the time of injection of the granular member 320 can be reduced, it is possible to avoid a local load from being generated on the granular member 320 and the rear partition lower portion 314. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear partition lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

  24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least more flexible than the resin material that forms the partition member 310) and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). And a non-penetrating recess 321 formed in a semi-regular polyhedron) and non-penetratingly recessed along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

  The non-penetrating recess 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and can also bias the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

  Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

  In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, it is possible to easily avoid breakage or chipping of the granular member 320. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the injection device 400 receives a load and is injected, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed collides with the front plate 311. Can do. Thereby, the load at the time of collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

  The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back partition portion 313, an electric decoration substrate 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electric decoration substrate 332. A lid portion 333 that is disposed on the right side and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 and is formed so as to accommodate the electric decoration board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331.

  The illumination board 332 is provided with light irradiators 332a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides, and the light irradiator 332a is irradiated with light having an optical axis in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as the light divided into particles.

  Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side may illuminate the right path (right-handed flow path) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are disposed. For one purpose. The light irradiated to the left side will be described later.

  The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed from a resin material having low light transmission (or light non-transmission), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 332 is fixed to the fixed plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is possible to avoid being shielded and visually recognized.

  The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixing plate part 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back partition part 313, an electric decoration board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixing plate part 341, and the electric decoration board 342. A lid portion 343 disposed on the left side and fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 341 so as to accommodate the electric decoration board 342 between the fixing plate portion 341.

  The fixing plate portion 341 is formed from a resin material having low light transmission (or light non-transmission), while the lid portion 343 is formed from a colorless and light transmitting resin material. For this reason, the electric decoration board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is configured to protrude to the left. Thereby, a player's visual field can be narrowed beforehand and it can avoid that the left side surface of the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is visually recognized by front view.

  Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent cover part 343, avoiding that the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is visually recognized.

  As for the electrical decoration board | substrate 342, light irradiation parts 342a, such as LED, are arrange | positioned at both right and left surfaces. From the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at the left side surface, the light which has the optical axis which faces a front direction is irradiated. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 without illuminating the left path of the game area.

  Here, the configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a of the right-side illumination board 332 is positively directed to the game area is that the pachinko machine 10 has a playability (normally Play left-handed games and play right-handed games during probability change, short-running, and big hit games). This will be described below.

  The game area of this pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the flow path of the ball on the left side of the game area, so during the normal game, adjust the launch intensity of the ball so that the ball flows down the favorite path The player performs an operation to do. For this reason, if the light emission intensity at the left side of the game area is too high, the visibility of the sphere deteriorates, which may hinder the adjustment of the launch intensity of the sphere and may cause dissatisfaction with the player.

  On the other hand, when launching a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically launches the ball with the maximum launch strength. The fired sphere is restrained by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the flow path of the sphere downstream is significantly reduced, and only passes through the same path.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one sphere passes downstream from the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that have not been balled pass through the guide route DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning port 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

  As described above, since it is not necessary to adjust the launch strength of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball is deteriorated in the right side of the game area (particularly, where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since the possibility of coming is low, it is possible to execute an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

  Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side. Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct light to the game area. Thereby, an effective light emission effect can be executed while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction with the player.

  From the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at a right side surface, the light which has the optical axis which faces rightward is irradiated. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. Thereby, while being able to visually recognize the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a as the light divided | segmented into the granular form, the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed board part 341 in the range away from the light irradiation part 342a, Visual recognition can be avoided. In addition, the object illuminated by the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at a right side surface is mentioned later.

  26A is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiation unit 332a disposed on the left surface side of the first light irradiation device 330 has an LED that passes through the partition member 310 and an optical axis passing through the rear surface side of the partition member 310. And an LED through which the shaft passes.

  Accordingly, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310 but also other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 are irradiated with light. The effect of irradiating can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right surface side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED through which the optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the rear surface side of the partition member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

  Thereby, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of the light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is reduced. Can be improved.

  In the 2nd irradiation apparatus 340, the comfort of the game in a normal state can be improved by suppressing the emitted light intensity to the inside of the division member 310. FIG. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the vicinity of the first winning port 64, I often see the range from the center of the game area to the left.

  In this case, when light is irradiated from the second irradiation device 340 to the inside of the partition member 310, the light shines at a position that is as close to the game area as that of the game area. Thus, the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved to the back side and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated from each other, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a It is possible to weaken the degree of influence that the game area has on the visibility of the game area.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emission that causes the inside of the center frame 86 to shine with high intensity in a front view while lowering the degree that the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 shines the game area. Production can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without reducing the visibility of the game area.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. Moreover, the direction of the light irradiated from the 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 or the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 is typically illustrated with the arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is disposed on the left side and the back side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding a vertical substrate unit 167 described later that irradiates light to the light guide plate 161. Thereby, since the light emission effect can be performed while avoiding the light from the light irradiation unit 342a entering the light guide plate 161, the light effect performed by the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are illuminated. It can be separated from production.

  When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, depending on the light irradiation path, the light guide plate 161 may emit light unintentionally, which may reduce the effect. In particular, since the light irradiated to the periphery of the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) easily shines the light guide plate 161, there is a possibility that the light emission intensity needs to be suppressed, which causes a reduction in the degree of freedom in rendering. It was.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel avoiding the light guide plate 161, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the freedom degree of the light emission effect around the light-guide plate 161 can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. The injection device 400 is a device that is disposed below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 is placed.

  28, 29, and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 illustrate the outline of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the back side. In the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350 as a fixed member, and a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24). A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between the fixed member 350 and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360, which will be described later. A restricting member 370 that restricts displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 that is disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed at the center.

  A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). Then, the base plate 60 is disposed on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

  Therefore, an operation of removing the firing unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed as preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally detached from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 is discharged from the fixing member 310 in a state where the launch unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

  The injection device 400 is configured to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350 so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted and linearly displaced. A linear motion member 410, an impact member 420 disposed above the linear motion member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface on the upper portion thereof; And a contact member 430 that is arranged below the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change state between a state in which the linearly moving member 410 can contact in the displacement direction and a state in which the linearly moving member 410 cannot contact.

  The injection device 400 is formed so as to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so that a load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430 and can rotate to the space forming member 360. The front transmission member 440 that is pivotally supported on the outer peripheral surface and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface, and the drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440 A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

  The injection device 400 is a member that is disposed so as to be displaceable on the back side of the space forming member 360. The injection device 400 is rotatably supported by a rotational axis parallel to the rotational axis of the front transmission member 440, and A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by an action, and a lid member 480 that is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable using a straight line that faces in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

  The design concept of the injection apparatus 400 having the above-described configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360. The driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in an intermediate range in which the driving gear 450 that rotates with the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is in the front range and the rear side. By transmitting to each of the ranges, displacement of each component member occurs in the front range and the rear range.

  From such a design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with an opening for transmitting a driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

  Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the range on the front side of the intermediate portion 401 and the range on the rear side of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the range on the front side and the range on the rear side. Details of the configuration in the middle range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

  First, a description will be given focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-described opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 protruding in a columnar shape from the upper end to the front side, and the columnar protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper end portions are supported on each other, a plurality of bar fixing portions 404 disposed at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar projecting to the front side in the vicinity of the lower end portions The lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

  The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw 411 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Accordingly, the linear motion member 410 is constantly urged by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position by the urging force before transmission of the driving force from the intermediate range. Although the coil spring SP1 is disposed obliquely below the linear motion member 410, this also has an aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

  The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 that are formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted, a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left and right center, On the back side, a linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction, and a lower ridge formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 below the ridge 414. 415 and a displacement restricting portion 416 that protrudes from the lower end at the center of the left and right toward the front side.

  The trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to contact the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 can be brought into contact with the collision member 420, and a portion other than the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. The

  The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive a load from other components during load transmission, and will be described in detail later.

  The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion that abuts the buffer member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by this contact (the rising side displacement end is set).

  The collision member 420 has a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-like shape that extends in parallel to the plane on which the linear motion member 410 is displaced from the rear side end portion of the curved plate portion 421. A plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in a long hole shape extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422, and the displacement direction of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 at the lower left and right center lower ends of the plate portion 422 And a buffer member 424 which is fixed at a position where it faces and is arranged so as to come into contact with the trapezoidal protruding portion 413.

  A cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

  The shock-absorbing member 424 is formed as a small piece of a square shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

  The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular long plate shape, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the long plate, and the other end of the long plate A projecting portion 432 projecting to the rear side with a circular cross-section, and a hook-shaped projecting portion 433 projecting to the front side with a saddle-shaped cross section at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Prepare.

  The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be able to be rotationally displaced.

  The projecting portion 432 and the hook-shaped projecting portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and will be described in detail later.

  The fixing member 350 is capable of receiving the motor fixing portion 351 in which the above-described drive motor MT1 is disposed and fixed, the buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to contact the displacement regulating portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 configured to be fastened by being screwed into a female screw formed in the circular protrusion 403 with fastening screws inserted from the front side into the through-holes inside thereof as recesses; And a guide portion 354 configured to guide the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24), which is configured by an inclined surface that sags from the front side and the left and right three directions.

  The shock-absorbing member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage or chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 is suppressed. be able to.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are disposed at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the urging direction. Thus, as will be described later, even if the linear motion member 410 is displaced at a high speed due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load received by the linear motion member 410 during the sudden stop Can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352 and 424, and the load can be dispersed at a plurality of locations.

  The cylindrical protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353. To release this connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted through the connection recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, in the state where the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12), a driver may be inserted into the fastening screw. It is configured so that it cannot.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance a situation in which the fastening screw is loosened accidentally and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened in a state where the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled. Can do.

  Next, a description will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that protrudes in a columnar shape from a substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-like portion extending toward the front side at the upper and lower end portions of the face plate portion, and disposed below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 that project from the rear plate portion to the front side, and are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right end portions and arranged on the same line so as to be able to support the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates a biasing force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side in the upper left part of the opening 361 Columnar protrusion 3 It includes a 6, a.

  The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centering on the shaft portion 362 is extended from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. The wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

  The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner side surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

  The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that the protruding tip is in contact with the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On the same upper surface, the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 are supported while the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

  The support pillar portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape projecting toward the left and right outer sides, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter that can receive the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

  The columnar protrusion 366 is a part that pivotally supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. The transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off by fixing a screw having a large head diameter to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366.

  The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a substantially U-shape, and is supported so that the columnar protrusion 366 is inserted with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366. A hole 471, a columnar protrusion 472 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471 from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side, and an axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the longitudinal direction And a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

  The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 to the front side, and is formed to be able to engage with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 is changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the rear transmission member 460, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 is changed. The details will be described later.

  A limiting member 370 is disposed on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and covers the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back side, and the electric wiring. Or a plurality of presser claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling.

  The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts displacement of the columnar protrusion 472 to the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). Thereby, since the cylindrical protrusion 472 can be prevented from separating from the rear transmission member 460, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the cylindrical protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 from being released. it can.

  The presser claw 372 is a part for temporarily fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent occurrence of fluctuations in the arrangement of the electric wiring (for example, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring due to vibration or the like) and to secure an entry path for other components. The lateral slide member 840 and the wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced along a path including a position close to the device 400.

  The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

  The lid member 480 is a member that is configured to be able to advance and retreat into and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and is an advance / retreat portion formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from the left and right end portions of the advancing / retracting portion 481, and a plurality of receiving end portions of the extending plate portion 485 that are received coaxially with the support column portion 365. Receiving portion 486, a transmission hole 487 that is formed in a curved long hole shape in the left extension plate portion 485 and through which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape that surrounds the right receiving portion 486 And has a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted in a state of surrounding the receiving portion 486. Right hip that is secured by It includes a member 488, a cylindrical portion to be inserted into the left side of the receiving portion 486, a left cover member 489 having a long hole shape portion continuous to continuously transfer hole 487, a.

  The left cover member 489 is formed with contact surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed instead of being drilled along the axial direction, and will be described in detail later.

  The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to be directed to the axis, it is not a shape in which the pipe is simply divided, and the radius of the arc and the formation length are changed corresponding to the left and right positions. This design intention will be described.

  First, the advancing / retreating part 481 includes an overhanging part 482 that makes a business trip to the approach side at the left and right center position. The overhang portion 482 is formed so that the overhang width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the projecting portion 482 and another constituent member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed), the load is directed to the left and right outside the constituent member. And the components can be driven to the left and right outside.

  Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhang portion 482 precedes the partition. Since the member 310 is entered, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a positional shift that may occur at a location where the deformed through portion 315 starts to enter (the center of the left and right of the overhang portion 482), so that the advancement / retreat portion 481 cannot enter the deformed through portion 315. Can be suppressed.

  Thirdly, the arc radius is increased in the vicinity of the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481, contrary to the left and right center position of the overhang portion 482. This is mainly to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) disposed on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays near the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

  This staying method is not completely uniform from side to side, and may be non-uniform from side to side. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and when sufficient space is not ensured, there is a possibility that the granular members 320 that have stayed unevenly and the advancing / retreating portion 481 collide with each other. .

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance / retreat portion 481 is increased in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular member 320 tends to stay. Thereby, since the space | interval of the advance / retreat part 481 and the curved board part 421 can be ensured long enough beforehand, even when the retention method of the granular member 320 becomes non-uniform | heterogenous, the granular member 320 and the advance / retreat part 481 are You can avoid collisions.

  Other design concepts will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be concave toward the retreat side. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the extended plate portion 485 from colliding with the retained granular member 320.

  In addition, even when the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has flowed down, the granular member 320 is bent into the concave formation portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper part of the collision member 420 by configuring the gap so as to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

  The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right. In other words, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape). This is a design that takes assembly into consideration.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. Since the support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, particularly on the right side, the support member 480 is supported when both receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape. It is necessary to divide the advance / retreat part 481 in order to assemble the pillar part 365.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured to be capable of preventing the particulate member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310 while being configured to be able to move the lid member 480 forward and backward in the partition member 310. That is, the irregular shaped penetration part 315 cannot be enlarged without limitation, and the design freedom of the irregular shaped penetration part 315 is limited.

  Here, if the shape collapses to such an extent that the lid member 480 cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, the forward / backward displacement cannot be made, so that the shape is required to have accuracy. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be collapsed due to factors such as assembly errors.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different on the left and right sides, and the advance / retreat portion 481 is not required to be divided. As an assembling process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is disposed on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a and inserted into the support column portion 365. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365.

  At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is disposed so that the support column portion 365 is opposed to the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

  After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 can be removed by supporting the cap member 480 with a screw head of a fastening screw screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the right support pillar 365. The forming member 360 can be rotatably supported.

  The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 of the transmission arm member 470 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in time series.

  34A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34B.

  35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35B.

  36A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG.

  35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34 and the advance / retreat part 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced to the entry side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at the entry side end within the displacement range, and FIG. 34 illustrates the lid member 480 at the retreat side end within the displacement range. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane illustrated in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane illustrated in FIG. 34B). ) Are orthogonal to each other.

  Therefore, without any countermeasure, the contact area usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending in parallel with the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is the left-right direction as shown in FIG. In an inclined state, it is considered that the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 comes into contact with the right side of the left cover member 489 (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts over the width direction of the left cover member 489 when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction. It is done.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c), and 36 (c), the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponding to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening and the left cover member 489 can contact each other in the left-right width direction.

  That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a. The second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination with respect to the left-right direction, and the inclination with respect to the left-right direction formed smaller than the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. A third abutting surface 489c that abuts against the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left cover member 489 in the shape of the upper side surface of the opening with respect to the left-right direction gradually decreases as the first contact surface 489a is maximized and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 is approached. Designed to.

  More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 in the contact state.

  Thereby, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, it is possible to always ensure the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 without depending on the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489) at a timing when a large load occurs, that is, a timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against the gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

  Thereby, the area responsible for the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduction in the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 is overloaded. is there.

  As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the lid member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advance / retreat portion 481 occupying most of the weight of the lid member 480 is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It arrange | positions on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-back direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction in which the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

  In this case, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the urging force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the urging force A part can be offset by the dead weight of the lid member 480.

  As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is larger than when most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. Can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial diameter direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retracted position to the approaching position is determined by the lid When the member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retract side, it is configured to be the longest.

  In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at a contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, and an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to be along (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

  Accordingly, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 is increased, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

  As a device for the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34C, the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side to the back side to a position exceeding the center in the width direction.

  Thereby, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by the deformation. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b), and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advance / retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side. Is done. For this reason, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 decreases from the shape of the advance / retreat portion 481 and the overhang portion 482 toward the center in the left-right direction.

  It should be noted that the radius of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the left and right center position is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to avoid the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum entry width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the cover member 480 is slightly over-rotated (which is caused by a design error for each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, the description will be given focusing on the middle range. The drive gear 450 is engaged with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 are engaged. The transmission member 460 is integrally rotated about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following description, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the front transmission member 440) will be described as a normal rotation.

  The front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 are configured to ensure the relative position and rigidity of each other on the sides facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite surface. A shape portion is formed. The detail of the shape part utilized for this driving force transmission is demonstrated below.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The direction of arrow XXXVIIa and the direction of arrow XXXVIIb are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front transmission member 440 has a substantially disc-shaped main body plate portion 441 and projects in the axial direction on the center side of the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove is formed on the inner side. A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is drilled to a size that allows insertion of the shaft portion 362 at the center of the main body plate portion 441, and a gear that is formed on the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 that covers the teeth, a detected portion 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation A transmission protrusion 446 that protrudes in parallel with the rotation axis from a position that is eccentric with respect to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the part 442.

  The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The front transmission member 440 rotates in the forward direction with the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 disposed in the first groove portion 442a. The second groove portion 442b through which the projecting portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as a reference for the first groove portion 442a And a fourth groove part 442d that connects the third groove part 442c and the first groove part 442a.

  The second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, but the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is abrupt. Designed to be

  The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a that is formed along the protruding direction in a straight line connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Accordingly, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction orthogonal to the straight line serving as a reference for the groove 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461. A groove forming portion 462 that protrudes in the axial direction of the main body plate portion 461, and a shaft portion 362 that is formed at an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 362 at the center portion of the main body plate portion 461. And a non-contact opening portion 463 that is formed so as to avoid the contact.

  The main body plate portion 461 is provided with a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range that does not function as a groove, and a groove portion that is recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotational axis.

  In this embodiment, for the purpose of calculating the center of gravity when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440 that are integrally rotated and displaced are viewed as an integrated object, and correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation shaft, The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation shaft, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation shaft can be suppressed. .

  The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove includes the first groove 462a formed along the first arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed in the first groove 462a. The first groove 462b is formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b, and the second groove 462b through which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (clockwise rotation in the rear view). A third groove part 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than that of the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove part 462d that connects the third groove part 462c and the first groove part 462a.

  While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the non-contact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460 It is designed so that the change in distance between is slow.

  Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

  38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40, and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated with an imaginary line as a schematic diagram to the extent that a change in length can be grasped.

  38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in time series. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 has flowed down to the collision member 420 and stopped, FIG. 39 shows an effect standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. FIG. 41 shows a launch standby state that is a state of waiting for the launch timing of the device 400, and FIG. 41 shows a launch state that is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the launch effect. In FIG. 41, the state where the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420 is illustrated, but the granular member 320 is scattered in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the entry side displacement end will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

  In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. Thus, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, and the player's eyes can be kept away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below the granular member 320.

  In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical protrusion 403 contacts the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

  In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the collision member 420 jumps up and moves up by the linear motion member 410, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is guided into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The flow down of the granular member 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

  In this embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixed member 350 and the collision member 420 are arranged. The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

  For this reason, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be biased in shape. In the present embodiment, the partition member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be received in a biased manner.

  Thereby, for example, even when the granular member 320 starts to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular member 320 returns thereafter, the granular member 320 returns to the collision member 420. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed in the right side portion, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner that it flows on the granular member 320.

  Thereby, since the right and left bias of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, the deviation of the arrangement of the granular member 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each launch effect is reduced. can do.

  Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 is one point with the trapezoidal protruding portion 413. It just touches with. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. In other words, it is allowed to change the posture in such a manner that it rotates around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403.

  As described above, for example, when the granular member 320 starts to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered compared to the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

  Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 is changed in posture, the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 coincide with each other in front view, and the adjustment left and right center position of the guide portion 354 is determined. It is considered that whether the granular member 320 that flows down flows to the left or right is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right due to the difference in contact between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

  On the other hand, if the posture of the collision member 420 is changed, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right side with respect to the center position of the guide portion 354 and flows down the center position of the guide portion 354. The granular member 320 is considered to be guided to the left along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. Thereby, since the granular member 320 returned later is easily flowed down to the side where the remaining granular member 320 is small, the granular member 320 can be easily distributed substantially horizontally.

  Note that the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is not always permitted in the same manner. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the columnar protrusions 403 are respectively disposed at the upper end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. As a result, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the columnar protrusions 403 are respectively disposed at the lower end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is upward at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. Thereby, in the case where the staying state of the granular member 320 (the left and right deviation of the number of particles) is the same, it is possible to stabilize the scattering method of the granular member 320 that receives the load from the collision member 420 and scatters.

  As described above, when the injection device 400 performs the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. Return to the top of the screen, and return to the production standby state. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for enabling this state change will be described in detail below.

  42 (a) to FIG. 42 (f) and FIG. 43 (a) to FIG. 43 (e) are a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420, a contact member 430, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. FIG.

  42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As a part related to mutual load transmission, the protruding portion 414 and the lower protruding portion 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430, and the hook shape The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown without being hidden.

  In order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. Is shown without being hidden.

  Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component member” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward. ) Is shown in time series. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state of the injection apparatus 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the normal rotation. By detecting the switching from the state in which the part 445 is not placed to the state in which the detected part 445 is entered, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

  FIG. 42B illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 comes into contact with the protrusion 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts to push down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42B, the front transmission member 440 starts to push down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

  Accordingly, since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other between FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, direct load transmission between the members is blocked. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 slightly vibrates, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

  FIG. 42C illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 starts to be released.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42B to the state shown in FIG. 42C, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. Indirectly, it can be transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

  On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in a direction in which the linear motion member 410 is pushed down. This is a transmission where the linear motion member 410 is a contact portion with the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotational displacement of the transmission member 440.

  The influence on the positive rotational displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are exemplified effects that make the speed controlled as the rotational displacement different from the actual speed, and influences that prevent the rotational displacement and cause the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

  FIG. 42D shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 starts to tilt. Is done.

  The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. In FIG. 42D and subsequent figures, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, that is, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is a direction in which it is displaced by its own weight. Therefore, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is substantially less than the state before FIG. 42D in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

  FIG. 42 (e) illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42E, in the state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still disposed apart from each other.

  After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to move upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the burden on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  FIG. 42F illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430. Is maintained in the third groove 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (a change in posture is prevented).

  Therefore, with respect to the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 with a speed in a direction facing each other is smaller than that of the contact. The embodiment can be softened.

  In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42 (f) is shown for easy understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear movement member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear movement member 410 and the contact member The arrangement of the constituent members in a state where contact with the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 has started is illustrated.

  Note that the state from the state shown in FIG. 43A to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43D corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

  The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with an overhanging portion that protrudes toward the opposite sides at the tip portions on the opposite sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slipping at the contact position between the lower ridge 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433, and the lower ridge 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433 are stably brought into contact with each other. Can be touched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the terminal position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this switching of the state occurs in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Is output.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the normal rotation. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the firing standby state by detecting the switching from the state in which the part 445 is disposed to the state in which the detected part 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430. The linear motion member 410 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and applies a load in the direction of raising the contact member 430 to the contact member 430. Displacement of the installation part 432 is restricted by the groove forming part 442 preventing it.

  The contact between the projecting portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a circularly curved surface (the outer surface of the projecting portion 432) and an arcuate surface (the inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The load generated at that time is directed toward the center of the circle.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotating shaft of the front transmission member 440. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is the front side. The rotation of the transmission member 440 can be prevented from being affected, and the displacement of the projecting portion 432 can be regulated regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

  Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43B, the state shown in FIG. 43B can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is released. Thus, for example, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 needs to be energized at all times in the firing standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 is increased. Can be improved.

  For example, in the case where the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, there is a restriction on the setting of the length of the display effect until the emission state is entered after the emission standby state is established. This is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand up is illustrated. Is done.

  After the state of FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove portion 442c, so the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is the front transmission. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

  Therefore, in order to release the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to turn off the power.

  In FIG. 43 (d), the restriction of the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is released by retracting the hook-shaped projection 433 of the contact member 430 from the displacement locus of the lower ridge 415 of the linear motion member 410. The arrangement of each component member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is lifted and displaced by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is jumped upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

  Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the standing direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the abutting member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also works to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the standing direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 applied via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since it is configured in the same way in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  FIG. 43 (e) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 has finished standing up. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43E, the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440, and therefore the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

  For example, in this embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was loaded on the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is raised in the subsequent displacement is also increased. Therefore, without a countermeasure, there is a possibility that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 is hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed in the first groove portion 442a, and from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to face the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 is hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

  If it is detected from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e) that the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated forward, and the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect stand-by state, and the MPU 221 (so that the state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of launch effects. The control program (see FIG. 4) is designed.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the firing execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the normal rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the directing member 410 that rises with the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the collision member 420 to jump off and the effect that the granular member 320 scatters is executed.

  Since this effect causes the granular member 320 to scatter in the player's field of view, the player's attention can be improved in a flashy manner. For example, in a state where the player does not know whether or not it is a big hit. At a timing near the end of the subsequent long reach, if it is a big hit, the player's interest can be improved by shifting to the firing state and producing effects by scattering the granular member 320.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is off), executing the effect of scattering the granular member 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a big hit, which is not preferable.

  Further, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (in the case of disengagement), it is a big hit as a result of the long reach being performed from the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. The player will be able to figure out whether or not the game will be off, which may lower the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a detachment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440, whereby the injection device 400 It is configured to be able to return to the production standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

  That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise), whereby each component member is displaced in the above-mentioned time-series reverse direction. Can be made.

  In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the standing direction (see FIG. 42E), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down so that the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are in contact with each other. By releasing (see FIG. 42F), it is possible to avoid rubbing when releasing contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

  Further, after FIG. 42E, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not a momentary displacement based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is a gentle displacement associated with the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

  Thereby, since it is possible to avoid the linear motion member 410 jumping off the collision member 420, the injection device 400 is placed in the effect standby state without executing the effect that the granular member 320 is scattered (see FIG. 42A). Can be restored.

  In order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, the detection sensor SC4 is detected after detecting that the detected portion 445 has been retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so that the front transmission member 440 is normally rotated until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

  As a result, it is possible to execute both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for preventing the granular member 320 from being scattered with the same preliminary operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect so that the player can easily recognize whether the game is a big hit or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of the success / failure due to a difference in driving sound.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be eliminated once. . This makes it difficult to grasp from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the reverse direction, compared to the case of performing control for switching the driving direction from the state where the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued. .

  Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled prior to the success / failure notification timing in the production, and even if a drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction, so a situation where the player can grasp the success / failure result is avoided. be able to.

  Accordingly, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the success / failure notification timing without risking the player to grasp the result of the success / failure by the driving sound. A range can be given to the stop timing. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, the subsequent effects are not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates against the control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

  44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, the change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each component member” in the description of FIG. 44) as the rear transmission member 460 rotates forward (clockwise). Illustrated in time series. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  FIG. 44A shows the arrangement of the components in the effect standby state of the injection apparatus 400 (see FIG. 42A). As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side.

  Since the lid member 480 receives an urging force toward the retreat side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load in a direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is generated via the lid member 480. By being transmitted to the rear transmission member 460, the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 may be affected without any countermeasure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 comes into contact with the third groove 462c of the groove forming part 462 in the state after FIG. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, since the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface are in contact with each other, the load generated by the contact is directed to the center of the circle.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotational axis of the rear transmission member 460, and therefore the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 44C, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change rotationally drives the rear transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480. At the same time, this urging force causes the cylindrical protrusion 472 to move upward. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied through the lid member 480 are: Since both are configured in the same direction in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  In FIG. 44D, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement terminal position of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 until there is no need to displace the lid member 480 to the entry side, and the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470 can be reduced. .

  In FIG. 44 (e), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at a midway position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement end of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), a firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end of the retracting side, and is configured to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

  In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing normal rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is a state after execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. e)). Therefore, the amount of the driving force of the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to be distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

  Thus, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the driving motor MT1. Most of this can be used as a driving force for rotating other constituent members that abut on the rear transmission member 460, so that a sufficient driving force can be ensured.

  45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually confirmed.

  45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. In order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. Is shown without being hidden.

  In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction in the state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), and the front transmission is performed. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, a limit is set in the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

  When the drive of the drive motor MT1 is continued in a state where the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 generates heat and may be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control is limited to the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. However, the details of this will be described later.

  46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of columnar protrusions 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  Also, in FIG. 46, the horizontal axis shows a guide for the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42A and 44A). That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), and 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

  In FIG. 46, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

  In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is described on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (angle is 0 degree), and each of the above-described components corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The arrangement change of each component by the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change in the right direction of FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each component by the drive control in the reverse rotation is in the left direction of FIG. Respond to changes.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in reverse before the launch state (angle is 287 degrees) is as follows: It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the launch state and is displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the speed of the upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

  In addition, since the collision member 420 has already risen after exceeding the launch state, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is regulated in the middle (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether or not the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

  For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees). If there is a detected portion, that is, if the detected portion 445 is not arranged on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of normal rotation. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

  By this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to return to the effect standby state at one end, and thereafter perform execution control of each effect. This prevents the situation in which the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 generates heat after a situation where control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) from the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotation speed that stabilizes.

  For example, if the arrangement is stable in 2 seconds from the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), so that the granularity during the flow down It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

  In addition, the rotational speed of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is not restricted to this, It can set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entry side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

  In this state, by stopping the driving in the production standby state, the granular member 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular member 320 is gathered to the left and right center sides along the shape of the lid member 480. Can do. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retracting side, and the collision member 420 is moved. Get on.

  In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 to be different, a plurality of types of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 can be configured.

  Thereby, the relative position with respect to the collision member 420 of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) can be changed for every launch execution control. Therefore, for example, by forming the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular member 320 to be fired (the arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be varied. The production effect can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. Next, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described.

  47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. FIG. 47 and 49, the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown, and in FIGS. 48 and 50, the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown.

  47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes an effect member 700 that can be moved up and down at the center position in the left-right direction and that can emit light, and a hemispherical illumination that is fixedly arranged to the left and right. Device 613.

  By performing the light emission effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, the player emits light from the near side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) and executes an effect of visually recognizing it. be able to.

  51 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is shown in an assembled state. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the front end portion of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is disposed on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes a main body member 601 having an elongated left and right shape that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and the front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 having a design surface disposed on the side, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by the upper arm member 620 and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2 A transmission gear 650 rotatably engaged with the main body member 601 and engaged with the upper arm member 620 on the left side so that the driving force of the driving motor MT2 can be transmitted; Annulus assembled to 1, provided with a torsion spring SP3 loading the biasing force of the upward to the upper arm member 620, and the presentation member 700 coupled to a distal end of the lower arm member 630, a.

  The main body member 601 is formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a pair of left and right guide holes 602 that are arranged in a straight line on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusions that protrude in a columnar shape from the left and right symmetrical positions in both front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 drilled in an arc shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 603, a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left side to the back side, An arc-shaped hole 606 drilled in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the central axis, and a circular shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center, the posture of the detection groove facing the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side on the back side A detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

  The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

  A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes from the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to drop off by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

  A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes on the back side is inserted into the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

  One arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a projecting in a square shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm portion is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in a direction in which the biased portion 625 is pushed down, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

  The arc-shaped hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the to-be-biased part 625 of the upper arm member 620 and torsion spring SP3 can be comprised so that engagement is possible.

  The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and supports the transmission gear 650 so as to be rotatable. The transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to drop off by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605.

  The arc-shaped hole 606 is a through-hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to drop off by screwing a screw having a large head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

  The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is disposed at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state or is disposed at any other position. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not

  The front cover member 610 is formed of a resin material having low light transmittance and is a thin member fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed at the left and right central portions, and a rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 that is formed on the left and right outer sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions, and that projects from the rear plate portion 611 to the front side, and is configured to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to emit light. Hemispherical illumination device 613.

  The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the visual field so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visually recognized. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, it projects to the rear side with a dimension slightly longer than the front and rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the body member 601 on the surface. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

  Accordingly, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in a space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. it can. In other words, since the posture change of the upper arm member 620 (for example, the posture change that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

  The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structural parts of these members. A pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a formed as a plane parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opened to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the upper left end portion toward the back surface. A recess 612b.

  The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1 formed with low friction due to its shape and material can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced along with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

  The shape of the side facing the sliding surface 612a of the pressing member PC1 is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is a point contact. It is comprised so that. Thereby, resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

  The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. The

  In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of the displacement amount to the front side of the lower arm member 630 is set in such a dimension that the rendering member 700 having the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not contact the partition member 310.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, whereby the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is separated from the partition member 310. The contact can be prevented.

  The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large plane, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a flat shape, and the shapes in the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed limited to an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion projects to the back side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured to project to the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side, and the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may be configured in the same planar shape as in the left portion of the present embodiment. good.

  The upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654 in addition to the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 being limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. The forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, so that a large load can be avoided from occurring locally.

  The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for electrical wiring that passes through the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electrical wiring that reaches between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, passes through the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then moves to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. Guided and passed through the production member 700.

  In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electrical wiring to the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is greatly displaced in the left-right direction in accordance with the displacement. Even in the case where the distance of about half of the left-right width of the back case 510 is displaced in this embodiment, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation where the electrical wiring is slackened and droops downward.

  The hemispherical illumination device 613 includes a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side of the hemispherical illumination device to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward in the horizontal direction center side.

  This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 than when the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 faces in the front-rear direction. it can. For example, it is easy to put light into the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or to irradiate the effect member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state so that the light can be easily noticed. Can be.

  The upper arm member 620 is formed in a long plate shape, and is formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted through the support hole 621. The gear portion 622 is formed on a circular arc centered on the support hole 621 and can be engaged with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and the lower arm member 630 is formed in a circular shape at the end in the longitudinal direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, formed only in the connecting portion 623 that can be inserted through the cylindrical protrusion 631 and the upper arm member 620 on the left side. A transmission hole 624 that is formed, and a biased portion 625 that protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a tip formed in a bowl shape.

  The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. Part 624b.

  The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion that blocks transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

  The biased portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the biasing force in the direction in which the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 are lifted and displaced is increased via the biased portion 625. Arm member 620 receives.

  Further, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated by the engagement of the tip flange portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

  The lower arm member 630 is configured to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which the electric wiring passes, and protrudes in a columnar shape from the middle in the longitudinal direction to the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 protruding in a columnar shape from the left and right outer side to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and a front-rear direction at a left and right inner position with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 And a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetratingly formed along a pair of arcs centering on the support hole 633.

  The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw having a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported on the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

  The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is connected to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a large-diameter head head screw.

  The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is configured so that the lower portion is thicker than the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right in a thick part, so that it is effective that the production member 700 changes its posture to the forward tilted posture. Can be regulated.

  The lower arm member 630 on the left side has an arrangement portion 635 that is open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin lid portion 636 that functions as a lid of the arrangement portion 635 disposed on the side.

  The arrangement portion 635 includes a proximal end side through-hole 635a that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the end of the columnar protrusion 632.

  The base end side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. In other words, the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 is guided from the arrangement side 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 through the proximal end side through-hole 635 a from the front side and guided to the arrangement portion 635.

  The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the production standby state, a lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is recessed behind the back surface. Is done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate portion.

  The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the short direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. Further, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper side wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, and is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring therein, and is disposed as a lid on the guide path. The thin lid portion 636 is reinforced by being fastened and fixed.

  Since the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636) and is guided to the effect member 700 side, members disposed on the front and back of the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from contacting the electrical wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members and being damaged.

  The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 configured from the same member and assembled from the back side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the main body plate-like portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other and have a slight gap so that the lower arm member 630 comes into contact with the rear side to limit the displacement. It functions similarly to the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side.

  That is, the lower arm member 630 is configured so that the pressing members PC1 are assembled on both front and rear sides and can be brought into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement, and to easily reduce the resistance generated with respect to the up-and-down displacement when the displacement is limited.

  The projecting tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is disposed closer to the back side than the back side end of the upper arm member 620. This prevents the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 even when the front end of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the back side to such an extent as to come into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed in the front-rear direction.

  This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is easily unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position of the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are front and rear. Since it is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the front and rear direction displacement of the lower arm member 630 is likely to occur due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

  The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 penetratingly formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted on the semicircular center axis of 651, and projecting in a cylindrical shape from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651 to the front side. A cylindrical projection 654, a detected plate portion 655 formed in a thin plate shape capable of entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the detected plate portion A thickened portion 656 thickened between 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side of the thickened portion 656 are provided.

  The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

  The columnar protrusion 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 through the cylindrical protrusion 654 as the transmission gear 650 rotates. The columnar projection 654 is inserted into a collar member having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a head-side large-diameter fastening screw is formed on the female screw portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar projection 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to drop off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

  The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are parts configured to be engageable with the above-described displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). Since the regulated hole 657 is disposed on the support hole 653 side (position near the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 changes to the displacement regulation device 180 in the regulation state of the displacement regulation device 180 (see FIG. 21A). The transmitted load (moment) is configured to be reduced.

  Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a location that needs to be able to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, the portion where the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur is formed thin, so that the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

  53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. A rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. A telescopic displacement member 740 that is disposed and configured to be able to be displaced in the same manner as the magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720, and the drive gear MG3 is fixed to the functional plate portion 720. Drive motor MT3 arranged on the back side, light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720, and executes the light emitting effect, and is fastened and fixed to the front ends of the plurality of expansion / contraction displacement members 740, respectively. Dude includes a plurality of shielding design member 760 to be combined so as to shield the passage of light at the front side of the light emitting effect device 750, a.

  The plate-shaped main body 710 includes a pair of columnar protrusions 711 protruding in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630 on the back side from a symmetrical position, and the columnar protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary projections 712 projecting in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 from the position on the arc centered at 711 to the back side, and a pair of columnar projections A through hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 disposed below the through hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a pressure disposed on the back surface of the plate And a member PC1.

  The through-hole 713 is a through-hole for passing through the lower arm member 630 and the electric wiring DK1 guided to the front end side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636 to the front side. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with other members or is visually recognized by the player.

  In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the upper surface goes to the back side, and therefore, the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 It also has a function to relieve the contact.

  That is, the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is disposed to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the rear side. Even so, when the wiring guide member 714 abuts against the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

  Similar to the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also slidably disposed on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of the upward displacement of the effect member 700, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower portion can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. With this configuration, the load generation position for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700 can be divided.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  The functional plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the center portion, and a cylindrical portion 721 in which the inside of the tube is formed, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 721 An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be placed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. A motor fixing portion 724 that has an opening and is configured so that the drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial long hole 725a A plurality of (in the present embodiment, five sets) guide holes 725 configured by a pair of intersecting long holes 725b that intersect at right angles with each other and extend radially outward on the extension line of the radial long holes 725a. Multiple (in this embodiment, The extended plate portion 726 of the location) and a pair (the book) protruding from the back side end portion of the flat portion disposed at the extended proximal end of the extended plate portion 726 at both ends in the width direction of the extended plate portion 726. In the embodiment, each of the extended plate portions 726 includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 and a pair of columnar protrusions 728 that protrude from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side in a column shape.

  The cylindrical portion 721 is arranged so that the end on the back side is in contact with the plate-like main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 with the internal through hole communicating with the through hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710. Is done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the back-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721.

  As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the center portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through the through hole. .

  The electrical wiring DK <b> 1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC <b> 7 that is fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT <b> 3 that is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

  The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through-hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to project to the front side, and the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detecting sensor SC7, so that the rotating plate 730 The posture can be determined.

  The guide hole 725 is a through-hole group formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged, and along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole shape is formed along a straight line orthogonal to a straight line that is a reference of the radial long hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole shape 725a. And a pair of crossed long holes 725b.

  The radial long hole 725a and the cross long hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary projection 727 correct the posture of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. The details will be described later.

  The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the tip on the back side can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710. In the abutting state, the functional plate portion 720 is inserted into the female screw formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side. Fastened to 710.

  In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

  56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  The rotating plate 730 is formed in a substantially disc shape from a resin material, and has a cylindrical portion 731 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side at the center and is formed so as to penetrate the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, and long through holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 733, and extended claw portions 734 extending in a claw shape radially outward at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733.

  The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the detection sensor SC7. And a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

  The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed, and is formed with a length that can ensure a rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 of less than about 120 degrees.

  Each guide hole 733 is formed in the same shape, and has a small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 and the center of the cylindrical portion 731 rather than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft, and a connecting portion 733c for connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

  Although the aspect of the connection part 733c is not limited at all, in this embodiment, it is formed so that the change of the length from the central axis of the cylindrical part 731 per unit angle changes corresponding to the position. The In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

  Thereby, the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the rendering effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 non-uniform.

  The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, is configured to be able to engage with an expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed toward the rear side in the thickness direction. The back side nail | claw part 734a and the front side claw part 734b formed in the front side rather than the back side claw part 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are divided at a substantially middle position of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

  The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The front-side claw portion 734b and the back-side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, respectively, which have different projecting tip positions from the front and rear of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, respectively. Although it guides to a radial inside, the detail is mentioned later.

  In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 has a longer extension length than the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Formed. In the present embodiment, the extending length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be relieved.

  That is, even if the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 has the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each expansion / contraction displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravity direction is different. For example, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and displaces in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. Therefore, without any countermeasure, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 extends radially outward of the extended claw portion 734. 740 1st to-be-guided protrusions 743b may be arrange | positioned, and the guidance to the radial direction inner side by the extension nail | claw part 734 may fail.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extended length of the extended claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The guide to the inside in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be executed stably.

  On the other hand, even if the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced by the influence of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extended claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. For this reason, the extended claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed shorter, thereby reducing the material cost and reducing the size of the rotating plate 730. Can do.

  58 and 59, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  58 (a) is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) Is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

  58 (a) and 58 (b), one of the five sets of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which is arranged at the top, is shown in a state in which they are arranged together. In FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in a state where it is discrete.

  The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is a member constituting a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members disposed in the front and rear two layers. Therefore, in the following description, a plurality of expansion / contraction displacement members 740 are disposed on the front side. A plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as a front layer plane, and a plane on which a plurality of long members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

  The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in two front and rear layers, and is supported by a pair of base end side members 741 that are rotatably supported at the lower end portion, and at the upper end portion of the base end side member 741 so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first elongate members 742, a pair of second elongate members 743 pivotally supported at the upper end of the first elongate member 742, and an upper end of the second elongate member 742 And a tip adjusting member 744 having a guide long hole 744a extending linearly so as to be capable of guiding.

  The base end side member 741, the first long member 742, and the second long member 743 configured by a pair of front and rear are designed so that the length in the longitudinal direction and the support position are the same in a pair.

  The base end side member 741 is a circle of a transmitted projection 741a projecting in a cylindrical shape from the lower end portion of the rear layer plane side member to the back side, and a back surface from which the columnar projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into a member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of the first long member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided protrusion 741c inserted through a through-hole formed in the outer periphery.

  The transmitted protrusion 741a is disposed in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

  The guided protrusions 741b and the guided protrusions 741c are disposed in the guide holes 725 of the functional plate part 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is disposed in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is disposed in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

  The first elongate member 742 is pivotally supported so as to be relatively rotatable about the front-rear direction axis at a substantially intermediate position in the elongate direction, and is projected in a columnar shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided projection 742a that is inserted into the upper end of the base end side member 741 on the side.

  The guided protrusion 742a is disposed in the crossed long hole 725b of the functional plate 725, and is guided in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

  The second elongate member 743 is pivotally supported at a substantially middle position in the elongate direction so as to be rotatable relative to the front-rear direction axis. A pair of protrusions projecting from the upper end of the layer plane side member to the front end surface of the front layer plane side member with a diameter of about the member width and projecting in a cylindrical shape from the protruding tip to the front side. A support protrusion 743a, and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear layer plane side to the back surface side.

  The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the back side claw part 734a of the extended claw part 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed radially inward by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

  The tip adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a length that extends along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. A pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape and a second guided projection 744b projecting in a columnar shape from the center position in the longitudinal direction to the back side are provided.

  The second guided projection 744b has a projecting tip disposed in front of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front side claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotating plate 730, A load directed radially inward is received by this guidance (see FIG. 57).

  The second guided projection 744b is not circular in the shape of the projecting tip, and is inclined close to the rotation plate 730 having a rotation center on the side of the transmission projection 741a as it is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in the rear view. The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59B) includes an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

  By this inclined surface, even when the arrangement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is slightly shifted in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when contacting the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730. Can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in a collective manner and when it is separated, it is arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The support protrusions 743a are disposed at both outer end portions or inner end portions of the guide long holes 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, arrangement | positioning (arrangement of a longitudinal direction) of the front-end | tip adjustment member 744 with respect to a pair of support protrusion 743a can be stabilized.

  The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjustment member 744, extends to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and covers the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 toward the front side from the extended tip. A member having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front and having a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) on which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extended tip. is there.

  The shielding design member 760 is configured such that a colored (red in the present embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisible, and along the back of the member at the right end. And an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in a form in which the plate surface is formed.

  Similarly to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflecting sheet attached to the front and back, and is disposed on the right side (next to the clockwise direction) in front view. The design member 760 is arranged so as to face the back side of the left end portion of the design member 760. When the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back side, the design member 760 is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

  The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be shifted from the back surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 to the back surface side. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid abutting (collision) along.

  This effect becomes more prominent as the disposition of the extended plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least as much as the dimension allowed for the shielding design member 760 as a positional deviation in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760. By disposing the extended plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extended plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

  Further, the shape of the front surface of the extended plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a plane whose normal is directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is comprised as an inclined surface of the aspect which approaches the back side, so that it leaves | separates from the shielding design member 760.

  Thereby, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right of the top shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even in the case of displacement to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position along the front surface inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the position in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760 right next to the front view Misalignment can be corrected. Thereby, the relative front-back direction position of the adjacent shielding design member 760 can be easily adjusted.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the second elongated member 743 of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 has a member that supports the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. The member that supports the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the left side portion becomes the right side portion by crossing the middle portion of the pair of second long members 743 in the front and back direction. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily inclined to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Since the structure of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to the five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side on which the extended plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so as to be easily tilted to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back side of the shielding design member 760 disposed to face the extended plate portion 761. In this state, when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided along (collision).

  In a state in which five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged together (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circular shape, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left (next to the counterclockwise direction in front view). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 is restrained from being displaced to the back side.

  According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side when the extended plate portion 761 abuts on the shielding design member 760 on the right side (next to the clockwise view in the front view). For this reason, the five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, whereby the positional deviation in the front-rear direction can be suppressed for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

  With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the arrangement of the outer shape of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. The

  60 shows a state in which the elastic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58). In FIG. 61, the rotating plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the elastic displacement members 740 are discrete. (See FIG. 59).

  In this embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the arrangement of the transmitted protrusion 741a that is disposed in the guide hole 733 as the rotating plate 730 rotates is the rotating plate. The state of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 changes by displacing in the direction of approaching the rotating shaft side of 730.

  In this state change, the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720. Therefore, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be displaceable so as to be released, details will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 53 and FIG. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an electrical decoration board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 that is disposed on the front side of the electrical decoration board 751 and is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Since an opening is formed in the center of the electric decoration board 751 and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, a region where the drive motor MT3 is disposed can be secured.

  The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a at the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a is, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring. However, since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a is, from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. desirable.

  Since no LED can be disposed in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, this is dealt with by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two parts.

  That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light transmissive member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a that is assembled from the front side and has a mirror-like viewing surface (for example, silver plating is applied). A mirror surface member 752b.

  An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the mirror surface member 752b is closed at the central portion, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be disposed at a position where the drive motor MT3 is disposed in a front view. . Thereby, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the reflected light by light irradiation from other directions (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical illumination device 613). It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized darkly.

  The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 62 to 64, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  62 shows the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the lowering state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extension state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

  63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half of the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is similarly halved.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the production standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed at the boundary position between the transmission part 624a and the margin part 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission unit 624a and is arranged at a position where the downward movement of the effect member 700 can be started is the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  This effect standby state suggests that, for example, the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect members including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10. The columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side before the suggestion effect is executed.

  As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shape portion that continuously extends from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position overlapping with 606 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 via the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed to the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, thereby being connected to the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated.

  Even if the above-described effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is an effect aspect in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in this embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. Controlled to change state.

  In this case, immediately after the player is informed that the effect member 700 does not move downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

  As a result, when an effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is performed, it is possible to avoid prediction of an effect related to the effect member 700 due to a difference in drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

  The margin 624b also has a function of reducing the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is raised. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the displacement of the columnar projection 654 thereafter is a margin part. The displacement is sufficient to slide along 624b.

  Then, no matter what position of the marginal portion 624b the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, since the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is allowed to be low, the rotation that can stop the transmission gear 650 immediately after the detected plate 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is not limited to the speed, and can be set large. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

  In addition, even when the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the columnar protrusion 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654.

  Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the lower arm member 630 is restricted from ascending displacement by the upper arm member 620, which will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. Compared to the state in the middle of the descent, the distance from the state in the middle of the descent to the overhang state is set larger.

  In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. And the player can visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is violently increased, and the effect of the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700 can be achieved. Can be improved.

  65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. In FIG. 65, for easy understanding, FIG. 65B is also shown as a view in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are omitted.

  65 (a) and 65 (b) illustrate the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates a state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. The overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. In other words, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detected plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before the execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. However, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the suggestive effect described above, and the drive motor MT2 is stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. Control is performed to change the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to the effect standby state.

  On the other hand, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side that causes the effect member 700 to move upward, the energization of the drive motor MT2 is performed when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. By controlling to release the transmission gear 650, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the columnar protrusion 654 in the production standby state. As described above, the upper arm member 620 is stopped. The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or reduced. Control is performed so that the drive of the drive motor MT2 is stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be disposed at the end of the margin 624b.

  Thereby, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even when the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), the cylindrical portion 183 is easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

  The position of the restricted hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 65A, and the position shown in FIG. It is set at a position partially overlapping with the restriction hole 657.

  Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed in to place the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state (see FIG. 15C), and then the transmission gear 650 is turned on. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted and displaced by driving control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG.

  The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can do.

  Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying a displacement failure error of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulated state.

  As a result, information such as an error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted, and information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be communicated to the clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  Here, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, so that the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set large. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced upward is excessive, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 is excessive, and the lower arm member 630 is moved to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward), so that downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. Thus, the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be reduced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 is formed. Can increase the contact area when the upper arm member 620 collides with the upper arm member 620. As a result, it is possible to avoid a large load locally occurring in the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being broken or broken.

  Thus, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently large contact area, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is excessive. Even if the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is moved by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

  66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the drive force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponding to the state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is disposed at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630. In the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is similar to the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are disposed at the ends of the arc-shaped holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

  Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. In other words, the lower arm member 630 can increase the degree of holding the effect member 700 in the effect stand-by state or the overhang state compared to the lowering state.

  In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is disposed at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and displacement in the rotation direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 is rotated in the rotation direction around the right cylindrical protrusion 711. The posture may change.

  In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left columnar protrusion 711, but in a direction rotating around the right columnar protrusion 711. The displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture is the short direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 is not restricted by the lower arm member 630 and may occur visibly, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the overhanging state, the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630. Thereby, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be effectively limited by the lower arm member 630, and the change of the posture to the extent that the effect member 700 can be discriminated can be prevented.

  In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the right side are disposed at the end positions of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 come into contact with each other on the right side. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, with the cylindrical protrusion 711 as the center. Note that the posture change in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back is limited by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 being along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 as described above.

  Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the left side are disposed at the end positions of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the left-hand side is brought into contact with the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back, with the cylindrical protrusion 711 as the center. Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 being along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 as described above.

  Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction) but also in the tilt direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the horizontal swing direction (rotation direction centered on the vertical axis).

  For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected by only a pair of left and right columnar protrusions 711, but the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed above the columnar protrusions 711 and the columnar protrusions 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at the upper and lower three positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the tilt direction of the effect member 700 can be changed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (the base side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 is tilted. The long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

  Further, as described above, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the lower member is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

  As described above, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives a load in the bending direction along the long direction, By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be firmly prevented.

  Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (downward) of the cylindrical protrusions 711 can increase the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can be lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

  In the present embodiment, the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is disposed on a horizontal plane that passes through the vertical center of the plate-like main body 710 of the effect member 700. In the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is disposed on the same horizontal plane.

  Accordingly, the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts forward around the connection portion with the lower arm member 630 can be minimized, and the lower arm member 630 can The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts backward with the connection portion as the center can be minimized.

  In other words, even when there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes may occur in the effect member 700, the displacement of the effect member 700 in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of any of the plurality of posture changes. Since it can, it can respond to any posture change.

  Thus, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 rubs or collides with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the visibility member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, the visibility of the partition member 310 to be deteriorated, or the visibility to be deteriorated (reduced permeability).

  In the state where the effect member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 contacts the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being displaced excessively only by accumulating the drive force in the transmission gear 650.

  In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing back and displaced. I have control.

  As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is set to be large (for example, large enough to lift the effect member 700).

  On the other hand, when starting the displacement of the effect member 700 upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

  For example, when starting the displacement upward, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 starts), it is possible to apply the driving force to the effect member 700 after starting the displacement.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the production | presentation member 700 of a stop state is displaced upward, the burden applied to drive motor MT2 can be reduced.

  In FIGS. 65 to 67, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner side surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may be caused by the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 that is arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. Like to do. Thereby, since the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed in the vicinity of the wiring guide member 714, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

  The shape of the inner side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load which electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electric wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is lifted and displaced from the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed with respect to the electrical wiring DK1. The DK1 is configured to be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

  As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be caused stably.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed in the arcuate hole 634 disposed on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and largely hidden in the thin lid portion 636 is in an overhanging state. Only in a position that can be seen in the rear view (see FIG. 67).

  The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state where the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or the state where they are disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Thereby, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Moreover, as a result of assembling and maintaining the production member 700 in a halfway position, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 and other components from being damaged.

  Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of enlargement / reduction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

  68 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  68 and 69 show a state in which the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the middle of lowering. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the expansion / contraction unit 600 is in the middle of the descending state, the production member 700 is not controlled to be expanded and displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter, and the intermediate position is not reached. Control is performed to allow expansion displacement.

  In other words, the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from being excessively large in front view, the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

  The decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered) at the midpoint of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700. As a disposition of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is disposed at a position (gap position) that is not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror member 752b is a light transmitting member including a position covered by the effect member 700. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

  Thereby, the visibility of the light irradiated through the light transmissive member 752a from the LED or the like disposed on the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53) can be improved, and the shielding design is transmitted through the light transmissive member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 with the mirror member 752b, the effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

  For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LED of the electrical decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53), the color of the ground of the shielding design member 760 on the mirror surface member 752b (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of irradiating light from the LED of the electric decoration board 751, the color reflected from the mirror member 752b is visually mixed with the color of the ground of the shielding design member 760 and the color of light irradiated from the LED. Can be different colors. Accordingly, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmission member 752a).

  The control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping the shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the collective arrangement state, or the drive direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) is changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching in small increments forward and backward.

  When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of the enlarged displacement up to the middle position, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the tip adjustment member. The intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 744a of 744 is set. As a result, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

  In a case where the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a collective manner while being able to achieve such a displacement, or when they are enlarged and displaced in the radial direction to the maximum, a support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743. Are disposed at both end positions of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the arrangement in the circumferential direction of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIG. 58 (b) and FIG. 59 (b)). ).

  Further, the midway position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69 and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the position may be slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or may be a position slightly before the position where the maximum displacement is performed.

  Here, in the state in which the extended plate is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position in which the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized by overlapping with the shielding design member 760 that is oppositely arranged). Since the part 761 plays the role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, the player can be visually recognized as maintaining the collective arrangement state.

  In the present embodiment, since the red reflection sheet is attached to the extended plate portion 761, similarly to the main body portion of the shield design member 760, the red color of the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized in the gap between the shield design members 760. Even in such a case, it can be configured such that it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

  Unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). You may make it make the extended board part 761 visually recognized by the clearance gap between the shielding design members 760 stand out.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmissive member 752a is formed from a colorless and light transmissive resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may form from a red resin material.

  In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmission member 752a that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 is shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red similarly to the design member 760, the player can visually recognize the shield design members 760 at least partially connected to each other.

  On the other hand, in the case of irradiating light from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light and stand out. The production effect can be improved.

  FIG. 70 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  70 and 71, the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlarged state of the effect member 700 are shown. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

  Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the posture change amount allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

  In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the aspect reflected in the mirror member 752b when light is emitted from the LED of the electrical decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53) can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is arranged at the midway position of the enlarged displacement.

  That is, reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed, and the ground color of the mirror surface member 752b (in this embodiment, silver) can be easily seen by the player. Therefore, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is enlarged and displaced, the decoration member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the same color light is continuously emitted from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53). The color of light to be visually recognized by the player can be changed in time series.

  More specifically, for example, in the case of irradiating white light from the illumination board 751, near the start of enlargement, the ground color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b is easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the emission color.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, and the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. Then, the effect member 700 is controlled to execute the enlarged displacement.

  That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only in a state where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged. Thereby, it can prevent that the shielding design member 760 collides with other structural members, such as the hemispherical front apparatus 613 (refer FIG. 47).

  In addition, in consideration of avoiding collision with other structural members, or configured so as not to cause a problem in displacement due to collision with other structural members, the displacement of the effect member 700 is enlarged during the vertical displacement. Control may be possible.

  The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a), and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. FIG.

  72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a), and 75 (a), the illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding. As shown, the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back. In FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

  72A shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and in FIG. 72B, the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is shown. The state (refer FIG. 68 and FIG. 69) expanded and displaced to the middle position is shown in figure.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at the boundary position between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). The transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at a midway position of the connection portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

  73 illustrates a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side starts to come into contact with the rear side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. The state where the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is guided by the back side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730 and has reached the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

  Since the influence of gravity differs between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the lower side and the member arranged on the upper side. It differs depending on the member.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side have their own weight, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

  This hanging portion is lifted by a load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing when the shielding design member 760 reaches the collective arrangement state is five, not simultaneously, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

  Thereby, the displacement of the production member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be performed stably. That is, when the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are disposed first, the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collective arrangement state. If it collides with 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early damage.

  On the other hand, when the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first and the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in the collective arrangement state thereafter, as in the present embodiment. Since the self-weight is generated in a direction that opposes the displacement of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of collision with the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed.

  In FIG. 74, the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the connection portion 733c of the rotating plate 730. Immediately after this, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is pushed by the back side claw portion 734a and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjustment member 744 is disposed away from the front side claw 734b.

  In FIG. 75, the collective arrangement state of the production members 700 is illustrated. That is, a state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the back is illustrated up to a terminal position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730.

  76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the production members 700, the surface on the center axis side of the back side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the diameter of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 Displacement outward in the direction is restricted.

  In addition, the surface on the central axis side of the front side claw portion 734b comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 to the outside in the radial direction is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with the front-rear width in the protruding direction, and the arrangement of the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744 and The posture can be stabilized.

  Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is configured to be slidable on the back surface of the extended plate portion 726. In this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 contacts the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collective arrangement state, the more it is inclined so as to project to the front side), and therefore, the load on the front side can be applied to the second guided protrusion 744b by the inclined surface 734c.

  As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state, the tip In a mode in which the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extended plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side.

  Therefore, while preventing the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from excessively increasing, the front end adjustment member 744 is given a load that is gradually increased in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear position and posture of the front end adjustment member 744 are given. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to arrange the shielding design member 760 in close contact with each other in the collective arrangement state.

  With reference to FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 is also common.

  As described above, the shielding design member 760 is formed on the side where the extending plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59A) is formed in the width direction (on the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed on the top, FIG. 74). (B)) is configured so that the posture is inclined so as to be arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side.

  This is due to the formation of the second long member 743, and this posture inclination similarly occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the position of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided projection 744b is compared with the tip position of the first guided projection 743b (the projection direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74B).

  On the other hand, the rotating claw 730 has the extended claw portion 734 disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. It is rotationally displaced so that a load can be applied.

  That is, for example, when the inner side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) abut on the second guided projection portion 744b, Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in the rear view, the inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged.

  The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of state change of the effect member 700 shown in time series in FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and thereafter, a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

  That is, while the shielding design members 760 are close to each other, the posture adjustment of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). On the other hand, after the approach between the shielding design members 760 is completed, the inclination inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), thereby the shielding design member. The plate portion arranged on the forefront of 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

  Note that the state shown in FIG. 74B is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 has occurred to the maximum. Further, the posture shift on the opposite side of the posture shift of FIG. 74 (b) is configured so as not to easily occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long member 743. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the extension board part 761 collides with the main-body part of the shielding design member 760 arrange | positioned facing.

  Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to contact the reduced side wall portion in the enlargement / reduction displacement of the tip adjustment member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extended plate portion 726, the abutment of the tip adjustment member 744 is brought into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction side end of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

  This not only corrects the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also stabilizes the posture when the tip adjustment member 744 is a single product and reaches the reduction side end of the displacement range. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

  Since the displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged symmetrically and has a symmetrical shape, the configuration of the left displacement rotation unit 800 will be described below, and the description of the right displacement rotation unit 800 will be given below. Omitted. In the following description, FIG. 5 is referred to as appropriate.

  77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

  79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and a metal fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. The rod MB2, the vertical slide member 820 inserted through the metal rod MB2 and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the drive fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened to the base plate portion 810 A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the left-right direction. As the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820 are displaced in the vertical direction, the driving force of the drive motor MT4 is changed laterally through the vertical slide member 820. Transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit to the ride member 840, a wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and the wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the electrical wiring.

  The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 where the metal rod MB2 is disposed, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 disposed on the front side, and a long side on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar projection 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. A drop prevention plate 814 disposed on the back surface side.

  The vertical slide member 820 has a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 to the back side, and a circle from the approximate center position of the region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back side. At the left end of the flat plate portion 821, a columnar projection 823 that protrudes in a column shape, a size that can be inserted through the connector portion of the electrical wiring, and omitted portions 824 a and 824 b that are omitted from forming the wall portion. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted (or provided with a cylindrical member), and a metal rod MB3 that can be inserted in the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821 A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or arranged with a cylindrical member) and fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the end of the metal rod insertion portion 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. Drop-off prevention member 82 configured to be possible And a shaft support portion 828 that is formed in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so as to be able to support the two-stage pinion 861 and is cylindrical from the upper end portion to the left and right outside in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 79). And a support protrusion 829 protruding in a shape.

  The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by forming a region where the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced inside. Omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as portions where the wall portion 822 is interrupted include a first omitted portion 824a that is formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b that is formed as a recessed portion that is opened to the back side.

  The upper part of the metal rod insertion part 825 is extended in the shape of a plate on the back side at the upper side, and the upper side detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A to-be-detected plate portion 825a that can be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

  The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the top end portion of the columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 in the upper portion of the main body portion 831. An insertion hole 832 that is formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw that can be screwed into the plate, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed, and in the region formed by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820 A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 in the vertical direction.

  The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed and a role as a winding center of electric wiring as will be described later.

  The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is moved up and down in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down.

  81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the lateral slide member 840 is formed in a substantially circular plate shape, the main body plate member 841 through which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and the displacement in the left-right direction is limited, and the back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side and constitutes a guide route for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and is formed in a circular plate shape in front view, and the circular member 847 And the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C 8. And a mediating member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing member 854 in order to adjust the central opening diameter of the wing member 854 to the opening diameter of the collar member C8. Comprises a central design member 858 columnar member can be inserted through the outer diameter to the center opening of the intermediary member 857 is projected from the rear side.

  The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the back side, a drive gear MG5 arranged on the front side, and a bar arrangement part 842 where the metal bar MB3 is arranged, and a lower side of the bar arrangement part 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

  The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the displacement of the electric wiring in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from rubbing against other constituent members, but details will be described later.

  The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing member 854 and a drive gear MG5 formed so as to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from different directions.

  The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a concave shape toward the back side in a cup shape having a size capable of receiving the wing-like member 854, and a cylindrical shape protruding from the center of the receiving portion 848 to the front side. A cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed to penetrate a shape that overlaps a cylinder centering on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 passes through the through-hole portion 848a. Exposed to a position where it can be seen in the rear view.

  In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can be engaged with the drive gear MG5, the drive force is transmitted with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, and the rotation of the wing member 854 is controlled. The wing member 854 can be rotated regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the production standby state.

  The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at the tip. This is a shape portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by disposing the radial projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, and details will be described later.

  83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

  The electric decoration board 850 includes a circular opening formed by an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a modified opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the opening, and a modified shape thereof. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs disposed on the back side at the outer diameter end portion of the electrical decoration substrate 850. Back side light emitting means 852b.

  In the modified opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be disposed inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-shaped member 854 is disposed on the back side of the modified opening 851 in the assembled state.

  The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the irregular opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thereby, the drive gear MG5 can be brought close to the electrical decoration board 850, and the gear part 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed.

  The front side light emitting means 852a is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the wing member 854.

  The back side light emitting means 852b is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotational axis of the wing member 854. In the present embodiment, a plurality of long concave and convex shapes formed along a circular arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847. On the other hand, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in front view.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, from the player without arranging the LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 on the front side of the electric decoration board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved in the radially outward direction. In other words, while using the electric board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electric board 850 is formed, that is, the outer side of the outermost diameter of the wing member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, it is possible to execute an effect of visually recognizing light on the radially outer side of the wing-like member 854 without increasing the size of the electric decoration board 850. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the wing member 854 rotates at a high speed, the back side of the wing member 854 becomes a shadow, and it may be difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory of the wing member 854. To that end, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electric decoration board, and the manufacturing cost of the board increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the size of the electric decoration substrate 850 is kept smaller than the rotation locus of the wing member 854, only the light viewing position is set in the radially outward direction from the rotation locus of the wing member 854. Can be displaced. Thereby, the production effect of the light emission effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

  Returning to FIG. 81 and FIG. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and is fastened coaxially to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decoration member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of changing the appearance of light between the inside and the outside with the decoration member 853 as a boundary.

  For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light Can be clearly separated by a decorative member 853.

  The wing-shaped member 854 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a drilled in the front-rear direction at the center, and extends radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And comprising.

  The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

  The wing member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. However, a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing member 854 is not provided, and the drive motor MT5. The posture of the wing member 854 is managed by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and the idle rotation after the energization of the drive motor MT5 is released is minimized. Therefore, the deviation between the posture of the wing member 854 assumed by the driving time and the actual posture of the wing member 854 can be reduced. In addition, you may comprise so that the attitude | position of the wing member 854 can be detected by comprising drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

  The mediating member 857 is formed so as to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the mediating member 857 can be rotated around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center to the back side, a radial protrusion 858b that protrudes radially outward of the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body. And a design protrusion 858c protruding upward.

  The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in a posture that allows the radial protrusion 858b to enter the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip from the back side of the circular member 847. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

  In addition to the function as the design portion, the design protrusion 858c can be brought into contact with the wing member 854 to function to adjust the rotation mode of the wing member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design protrusion 858c and the front surface of the wing member 854 are arranged close to each other so as to rub, stabilization of the stopping posture of the wing member 854 can be achieved by using the increased resistance at the time of rubbing. Can be planned.

  Thereby, as a drive control mode of the wing member 854, a drive mode that continues to rotate for a long time and a drive mode that intermittently generates a rotation of about one rotation (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced) In the latter driving mode, the intermittent stopping posture of the wing member 854 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 79 and FIG. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to mesh with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A rack member 862, and a dropout prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off the vertical slide member 820.

  The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862, and a pinion having a pitch circle radius longer than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a, and the gear teeth and teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 The small-diameter pinion 861b and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

  The rack member 862 is formed in an elongated shape on the left and right sides, a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and the longitudinal direction opposite side to the formation position of the gear portion 862a A columnar protrusion 862b that protrudes in a columnar shape from the end to the front side.

  In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with the same shape gear teeth, and the pitch circle radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a The ratio of the large-diameter pinion 861b to the pitch circle radius is 9:16. Therefore, the ratio between the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 in the left-right direction and the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 in the left-right direction is maintained at 9:16.

  The columnar protrusion 862 b is formed with an outer diameter that can be disposed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear side end of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the cylindrical protrusion 862b is disposed on the transmission guide portion 813. Even if it moves to the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814, the thickness is set such that the cylindrical protrusion 862b does not fall off the transmission guide portion 813.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from dropping from the transmission guide portion 813 when the drop prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

  In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

  Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but details will be described later.

  84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 that is formed in a long curved shape and one side is opened, and the long main body portion 871. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 that is disposed in the vicinity of the support hole 872 and can be disposed in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be disposed. A plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open end portion of the long main body portion 871 and a resin mold for forming the claw portion 874 can be extracted. And a circular projecting portion 876 that projects from the vicinity of the other end in the longitudinal direction of the long main body portion 871 in a circular shape in a cross section parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872.

  The long main body portion 871 is a portion where electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is disposed, and includes a narrowed portion 871a whose width is shortened at an intermediate portion thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the length direction of the long main body portion 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion on the side opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the length direction.

  The narrowed portion 871a functions as a portion that sandwiches the electric wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 loosely so as not to cause disconnection and prevents the electric wiring from being excessively displaced. The diaphragm 871a can prevent the electrical wiring disposed on the open side of the long main body 871 from being displaced beyond the diaphragm 871a.

  The support hole 872 is formed in such a size that the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) can be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is pivotally supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

  The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through-hole through which the electric wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is disposed close to the support hole 872, the amount of positional deviation of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring as the wiring arm member 870 rotates.

  The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a manner of being accommodated on the open side of the long main body portion 871 from dropping off from the long main body portion 871. Further, the space for removing the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through-hole 875 having a minimum area, so that the electrical wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It is possible to prevent the outer side (the side on which the through-hole 875 is formed in this embodiment) from coming out.

  The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be disposed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from dropping from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881. A path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side opened, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open part, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side at a position separated in the vertical direction. A path passing through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

  That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a that protrudes to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by lacking the wall portion 882a, and a lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 formed in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows insertion of an electrical wiring connector in the portion, and from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 in a range that does not overlap the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extending portion 885 that is extended, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extending portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. A columnar projecting portion 887 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

  On the back side of the path forming member 882, a space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed, and in the horizontal slide member 840 that is displaced in the horizontal direction in accordance with the displacement, the wall portion 882a is closest to the front side. It enters the back side of the wall portion 882a at the position (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  That is, the lateral slide member 840 is disposed on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that constitutes a path along which the electrical wiring is guided, at a position near the lower end of the displacement. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the overlapping of the arrangement of the electric wiring and the horizontal slide member 840 in front view.

  In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and the displacement in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 among the displacement of the wiring arm member 880 is the extending portion 885. And the prevention plate 881. Further, the length in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total length in the width direction of the long main body portion 871 and the circular projecting portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from dropping from the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

  The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electric wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 is passed to the back side.

  The guide recess 886 is a connecting recess 886c that connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. With.

  The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

  86 to 89, the displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described. 86 to 89, the state in which the displacement rotation unit 800 changes state from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in time series.

  86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, and FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a displacement rotary unit 800 in LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line in FIG. 89 (a).

  86 shows the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is the displacement path. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the right end state and the production upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the right end state and the production upper end state. A halfway left end state arranged at the left end of the displacement path in between is shown, and in FIG. 89, the effect upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

  In FIG. 86 (a), FIG. 87 (a), FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 has a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are made visible by omitting the illustration of the other shape portions. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the up-and-down displacement.

  86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b), and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lateral slide member 840 is For the purpose of illustrating only the lateral displacement width, a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 is illustrated.

  86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 accompanying the change in the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880 to the inside of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. Although it is guided to the horizontal slide member 840 through the enclosed space, details of the displacement will be described later.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can reciprocate in the vertical direction. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the vertical slide member 820 is disposed at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is disposed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacement rotation unit 800 is set in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

  In the effect standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to be retracted from the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840, it is avoided that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Accordingly, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent on the left and right sides.

  The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the longitudinal slide member 820 is displaced upward from the effect standby state, and the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the right end state on the way (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the middle right end state based on the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

  In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the upward direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the upward direction, and the posture is maintained.

  That is, in the middle right end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical concave portion 886a of the guide concave portion 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right accompanying the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the stand-by state to the right end state is executed without any change in the posture of the wiring arm member 870. The Thereby, it is possible to avoid the collision between the members due to the displacement of the displacement timing, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

  86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction as the vertical slide member 820 is moved upward. With this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement is shifted in the left-right direction beyond the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813.

  This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862 a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teeth on the two-stage pinion 861. Combined. Therefore, the pitch circle radius ratio of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio between the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

  In this embodiment, since the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16, the left and right positions of the transmission guide portion 813 The horizontal slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by a left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount by a constant (ie, 16/9 = about 1.78).

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the middle left end state, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced outwardly to the left and right as in the effect standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

  In such an arrangement, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed as shown in FIG. That is, in the process from the middle right end state to the middle left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting concave portion 886c formed on the back side from the front vertical concave portion of the guide concave portion 886. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 as the support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced compared to the effect standby state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is configured so that the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 occurs after the lateral sliding member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of descending displacement, the reverse (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is disposed at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction) is established.

  As a result, even if a displacement occurs between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to avoid a situation where the lateral sliding member 840 collides with the wiring arm member 870.

  The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end portion (outer end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is only the vertical displacement and the posture change in the front-rear direction. In other words, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can continue to be disposed at the left and right outer ends that are not likely to be noticed by the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 are guided. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of view.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is in the period until the production upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is reached. The guide protrusion 886 is disposed in a rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connection recess 886c, and a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( The distance in the front-rear direction with reference to FIG. 84 is maintained in a minimum state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 configured to change the posture in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, there is an advantageous effect that it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the constituent members.

  For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is disposed at a rearward position, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right (toward the left and right inside). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is disposed at a position to the right of the horizontal slide member 840 (toward the left and right inside), the displacement rotation unit 800 can be downsized to avoid contact. It may be necessary to deal with this. That is, the design freedom of the displacement rotation unit 800 is lowered.

  Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at the front position, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 disposed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members on the back side is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning port 640 disposed in the right region of the game board 13 in particular. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid or the like tends to be low.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by the wiring arm member 870, thereby preventing the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 from being restricted. It can avoid that the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the structural member of the back side of the board 13 falls.

  That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side so that the electric wiring DK2 is disposed on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840. Is prevented from being limited by the electric wiring DK2.

  In addition, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and at the upper position where the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2) is to be disposed, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed rearward to DK2 is arranged at the back, leaving a space on the front side. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the member arrange | positioned in the game board 13 can be improved as a structure of the solenoid etc. for driving the electrically-driven accessory 640a (refer FIG. 2) of the 2nd winning opening 640. FIG.

  The state change of the electrical wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Here, the state change of the electric wiring DK2 means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around a column.

  In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper part (side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b extends up and down exclusively and is not preferred to bend. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so that it is more rigid than the portion where the lower winding portion DK2b is wound and displaced. Higher is preferable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b, and the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the part to be wound and displaced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the cable tube is disposed between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. Yes.

  In addition, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to be vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation in the electrical wiring DK2.

  86 to 89, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and the lower side The winding part DK2b is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical projecting part 887 below the wiring arm member 870.

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a disposed so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a manner of expanding and contracting in the radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. Configured.

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b disposed so as to be wound around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 is displaced in such a manner as to expand and contract in the radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 887. Configured to be possible.

  That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured differently from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In the present embodiment, the planes are orthogonal to each other, and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is the first omission part 824a, the second omission part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

  Displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed when the portion of the wiring arm member 870 disposed inside the long main body 871 is sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

  From this point, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 in accordance with the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, it demonstrates separately below.

  First, the displacement of the upper winding part DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion wound around the columnar protrusion 823 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and on the left side of the wiring guide member 844 This means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

  The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and the production standby state that extends most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). The wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged with no load (or a position where a slight gap is left). Thereby, the load given to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall part 822 in an effect stand-by state can be reduced.

  When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled, and the inner side in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical protrusion 823. The displacement length of the lateral slide member 840 is supplemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed, and the upper winding is performed radially outward with the cylindrical protrusion 823 as the center. The part DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a that inclines downward from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844 protrudes, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is outward (the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844). And the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

  Next, the displacement of the lower winding part DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from the position where the lower winding portion DK2b hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 in the left side view (viewed from the left and right outer sides) around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (the cylindrical protruding portion 887). Means a portion up to a portion including the portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction and is disposed in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

  The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as a limit, and the production standby state that extends most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged with no load (or a position where a slight gap is left). Thereby, the load given to electric wiring DK2 from wall part 882a in an effect stand-by state can be reduced.

  When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction with the cylindrical protruding portion 887 as the center. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and lowered downward in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical protruding portion 887. The side winding part DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 opens in the inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, the lower winding portion DK2b is located between the columnar protruding portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (columnar). It is possible to prevent the lower winding portion DK2b from being pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

  In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is disposed is disposed below the lower end position of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, and thus the lower winding portion DK2b is attached to the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). It is possible to displace using the full width of the front and back.

  Therefore, a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, so that the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can have The allowable vertical displacement amount can be increased.

  90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of the window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flows whose front side is opened from the resin member. A spherical flow down unit 150 that is formed in a road shape and is disposed in the lower part on the back side of the base plate 60.

  The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive a ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving flow path 152 and a long box-shaped member whose front side is open, and is connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow path 151 and fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side. A flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 projecting inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the sphere.

  The plurality of ridge portions 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides with an interval of about the diameter of the sphere for each of the left and right wall portions. Thereby, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

  The functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 enter the second winning port 640 in addition to the function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge path (not shown). There is a function of improving the effect of rendering by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a ball in the vicinity of the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to easily notice a situation where payout has not been performed due to a malfunction at the gaming machine store side.

  As will be described below, since it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate channel LM1, the position of the detection sensor is set downstream of the intermediate channel LM1, etc. It is also possible to delay the timing for paying out a prize ball and the timing for holding display.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is an intermediate channel LM1 (see FIG. 5) that is disposed so as to be visible in front view in the left-right direction of the guide path DL1 through which the ball deviated from the second winning port 640 flows. 27).

  Similarly to the guide channel DL1, the intermediate channel LM1 is formed so as to be guided vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag direction. That is, since the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the sphere flowing down the guide flow path DL1 look the same, the sphere in the right path of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the right-handed game. Can be made difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

  Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down in the right-handed game is information directly related to the player's profit, and the information on the nail (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60 is provided. This is a part where an individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 occurs corresponding to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and a ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, whether the ball easily flows down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 in the right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. Different.

  A ball that has not entered the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction in which a right-handed game is performed will flow down the guide route DL1 and enter the general prize opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (becomes a waste ball).

  From here, whether or not to enter the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. Then, compared with the case where attention is paid only to the second winning port 640, the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when attention is paid to the guidance route DL1, because the guidance route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

  Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 is confirmed, and the frequency of the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the frequency of occurrence of a waste ball in the right-handed game, etc. are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game taking into account.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a sphere that flows down the guide route DL1 and a sphere that enters the second winning port 640 and flows down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning port 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage the game to continue.

  On the other hand, since the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and is discharged from the game area, it flows down vertically as it is, and the specific winning opening 65a is seen in front view. If it flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, and there is a risk of hindering the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the sphere to flow down to the left and right inside by the first receiving flow path 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the sphere reaches a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in front view. This is prevented (see FIG. 2). Thereby, it is possible to easily distinguish a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a from a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view through the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. Let the sphere flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, since the sphere guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81, attention is paid to the display on the third symbol display device 81. The player who is not paying attention to the right-handed path can recognize the presence or absence of the ball entering the second winning opening 640.

  Accordingly, the player can be made aware of the presence or absence of a ball entering the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when looking away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player misses the display, and a comfortable game Can be provided.

  The sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows downward and diagonally to the left on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. Since this sphere is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the sphere flowing down can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

  Further, by ensuring a long left and right width of the flow path of the sphere, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 can easily cross each other. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball flowing down inside the second receiving flow path member 153 to enter the player's field of view.

  92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decoration means 170. FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

  92 to 95, the light guide plate effecting means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to come into contact with the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 that is formed of an impermeable resin material and aligns the light guide plate 161 and a center frame 86 that is formed of a light transmissive resin material and presses the lower side portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path component 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material; A plurality of left and right support members 165 configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner that the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 are pressed from the back side. A horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the upper support member 162, and is formed in a vertically long shape. And a vertically placed substrate unit 167 which is disposed along the left inner wall of the center frame 86 from the front side and fastened and fixed.

  The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material and disposed at a central position near the upper portion of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material. The second decorative member 174 disposed on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86 and the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material on the front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86. A third decorative member 177 arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 is a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 configured to be fastened and fixed at a central portion thereof, a blank member 173 configured of a separate member as a blank portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally elongated groove portion 171a in the shape of a horizontally elongated groove on the back side. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the electric board of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate effecting unit 160 can be disposed.

  The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position that slightly overlaps the lower side of the opening 86 a that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the top of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, while the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. Opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

  With reference to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the laterally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 are appropriately referred to.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back of the front side of the illumination board of the horizontally placed board unit 166, and light is irradiated along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. The light that has reached the reflection-shaped portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the one decorative member 171 can be made to be conspicuously visible.

  Thereby, even in the state where the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, the mode of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depending on the forming range or the forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. Can be visually recognized with different.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the LEDs on the upper surface. The upper and lower rows are arranged in two horizontal rows: a row parallel to the row and a row formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the horizontally long groove portion 171a, and the back row on the bottom surface is arranged outside the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

  By comprising in this way, light can be irradiated to the reflective shape part 171b by LED arrange | positioned at the row | line | column of an upper surface, and the front row | line | column of a lower surface, and another light emission object is made by LED arrange | positioned at the back row | line | column of a lower surface. Light can be irradiated.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light enters from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 is used to make the light guide plate 161 shine.

  Note that the upper support member 162 is disposed between the front and rear rows of the LEDs disposed on the lower surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166. Thereby, the light emitted from the front and rear rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

  The horizontally placed substrate unit 166 is disposed directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. Thereby, the light irradiated to the display area side and the light irradiated to the game area side without irradiating the display area side can be clearly separated.

  The central decorative member 172 is disposed at the front and rear positions similar to the reflective shape portion 171b, while the front and rear surfaces are formed as flat surfaces. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, it is possible to avoid light being reflected in intensity, and visibility can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specification, so-called another specification) is displayed by the number of the star shape. It is configured to be able to. By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when the pachinko machine 10 having different performance types is manufactured, the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

  The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171 and has a shape different from the shape formed in the reflective shape portion 171b as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate (in this embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed, the reflected light is configured to look different from the reflective shape portion 171b.

  97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII in FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that has reached the reflective shape portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection and refraction, and On the other hand, the light that has reached the margin member 173 is not reflected mainly, but is mostly transmitted and travels as it is.

  Thereby, while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 is advanced in the vertical direction, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow, so that it emits light in an arbitrary shape in a front view. It can be visually recognized. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if the LED is arranged on the back side and the light emission effect is performed.

  The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 colored in an arbitrary manner on a thin plate member (sheet-like member) having low permeability, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Thereby, it can comprise so that the back side of the 2nd decoration member 174 cannot be visually recognized easily.

  Thereby, a game area (particularly the left side) formed on the front side of the base plate 60, and a formation area of the light guide plate 161 in a front view (including an area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81). Can be clearly divided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

  The third decorative member 177 has a three-dimensional shape in which a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal shaped portions arranged in the front and rear positions are combined on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are formed.

  Similar to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed in a space disposed between the light guide plate 161 disposed portion of the center frame 86 and the guide path DL1. The

  Accordingly, it is possible to execute a light effect that is viewed three-dimensionally instead of a light effect that is visually recognized in a plane between the light guide plate 161 placement portion and the guide route DL1. That is, a light emission effect with a depth can be executed in a front view.

  For example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the light is irradiated in front view, which position in the front-rear direction position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is determined. It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the near side is lit up and the back side is lit up and shown from the player's perspective.

  In this embodiment, as the means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotating unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed. The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with a case where light is emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178.

  Further, for example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the front view is irradiated with. Which position of becomes brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the near side is lit up and the back side is lit up and shown from the player's perspective.

  In the present embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the launch effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiation device 330 functions so as to shield at least a part of the light directed from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the arrangement.

  Thereby, the extent to which the aspect of the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on the display effect aspect of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It can be easily avoided that the color of light visually recognized by a person becomes purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, it is possible to make the light visually recognized via the three-dimensional decoration member 178 easily visible independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing down the sphere falling unit 150 is configured to be visible in front view and the entire sphere is configured to flow along the same route has been described. However, the sphere falling unit of the second embodiment is described. At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of the plurality of paths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow down unit 2150 is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left as a difference from the ball flow down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. And a third receiving channel 2155 formed with a size that allows a sphere to flow down.

  The third receiving flow path 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has an inclination angle that is set to be gentler than that of the first receiving flow path 152, and a lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 as viewed from the front. , And a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from a front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

  The flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the flow velocity of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 because of the shallow inclination angle. The sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in a front view. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be put into the player's field of view for a long time.

  Accordingly, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, attention to the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without a sense of incongruity.

  The guidance of the sphere to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 in the same manner, and along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching means switches whether to flow in the first direction D21 flowing down or to flow in the second direction D22 flowing down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

  In the present embodiment, the ridge portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, when the next sphere reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the sphere flows down the second receiving flow path member 153, the sphere is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. .

  Such a situation is likely to occur when, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second prize opening 640 in succession, such as a plurality of balls entering in succession. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation where the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning port 640 in a row.

  The mode of the switching unit is not limited at all. For example, an opening / closing plate configured to be switchable using a driving means such as a solenoid is provided in the ball flow-down unit 2150 so as to switch between a state allowing the flow of the ball in the first direction D21 and a state restricting the flow. In addition, an electromagnet arranged to generate a magnetic force at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is arranged, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to flow down the sphere. You may make it switch a path | route.

  According to these methods, not only the flow path of the sphere can be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but the sphere can be stopped or the sphere can be reversed. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to perform switching of the downstream flow path.

  As described above, when the flow path of a sphere is switched using a device that uses electricity, whether the sphere flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22 can be controlled by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). it can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

  For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the case where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot of the player who visually recognizes that the ball is flowing down 2155.

  In this case, the player's line of sight is most easily collected at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152 serving as a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharged ball (game) flowing down the ball flow down unit 2150 It is possible to improve attention to a ball that has already been ejected from the area.

  As described above, when the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155, the expected value of the jackpot of the lottery when the frequency of entering the second winning port 640 is high or when entering the second winning port 640 is reached. Suggests a high case.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and when the passage of the sphere is determined, control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired. .

  As described above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the fire standby state (FIG. 40). take time. On the other hand, since it is determined whether or not to fire the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes a certain amount of time until the ball reaches the discharge unit 2155b, The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state using this flow-down time.

  As a result, the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to fire. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. Compared with the case of controlling to, the flow of the sphere and the firing timing of the granular member 320 can be easily matched.

  For example, there may be a case where a drop in the flow velocity of the sphere occurs due to the oil adhering to the sphere adhering to the first receiving flow path 152. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, firing of the granular member 320 is executed before the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, which may reduce the effect.

  On the other hand, at the same time as the passage of the ball is determined by the detection sensor SC21, the control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired until the ball reaches the third receiving flow path 2155 until the player can see the ball. After focusing attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, it is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects by executing a powerful effect that spreads to the area of the light guide plate 161 by the firing of the granular member 320. it can.

  Note that the arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 through which the sphere flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) viewed through the light guide plate 161 are partially in front view. Therefore, the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

  In addition, you may make it combine the control which does not discharge the granular member 320, when a ball | bowl passes the detection sensor SC21. For example, when the big hit is made when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed so that the probability of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit becomes high.

  In this case, since the types of effects after the sphere is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can be increased, the player for the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage where the sphere is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention power.

  In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, it is possible to improve attention to the display effect on the subsequent third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position the detection sensor which has a function similar to the function of detection sensor SC21 in another location. For example, you may arrange | position in the location through which the ball | bowl entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passage timing of the ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball becomes more advantageous.

  A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be enlarged / reduced / reduced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, In the radial enlargement / reduction displacement, a section that is not symmetrical is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit 3600 according to the third embodiment. The difference between the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 and the first embodiment is only in the effect member 3700, and the configuration of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 is common. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged at the midway position (intermediate position) of the enlargement / reduction displacement in the radial direction. As shown in FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the use of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, the lower two pieces and the upper left 1 While the sheets have the same length and are radially expanded and displaced, the upper one sheet and the upper right sheet are still in a collective arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the rotating plate 730 includes another guide hole 3733 in place of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 when viewed from the front. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment coupling portion 3733c that couples the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

  The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connecting portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacent in the clockwise direction) It is formed so as to approach rapidly toward the small-diameter arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

  That is, in the displacement mode in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 guided by the connection portion 733c is enlarged and displaced in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjustment connection portion 3733c. The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 guided in the above is not expanded in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The operation caused by the displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 left-right asymmetric, the center of gravity position of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position accordingly.

  As a result, in the effect member 3700, a load in a direction for correcting the shift of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in front view is generated by its own weight. This load can cause the effect member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction about the front-rear axis, so that the shielding design member 760 has a radial direction centered on the rotation axis of the effect member 3700, and a rotational direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

  Thereby, the direction (namely, it is not planned only from the shape of the function board part 720 (refer FIG. 55) which is a member for displacing the shielding design member 760, the rotary plate 3730, and the expansion-contraction displacement member 740 (refer FIG. 59)). The shielding design member 760 can be displaced in the rotation direction.

  In this embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same for the other portions, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same in the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

  For this reason, after the position of the center of gravity G31 shifts in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of the enlarged displacement in the radial direction. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained while being displaced, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

  A production example using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time and are performed individually. However, this purpose is to avoid a collision with another configuration. .

  In this embodiment, after adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled to be executable simultaneously. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be enlarged and displaced in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is displaced downward.

  In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the radial displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is returned, so the effect member 3700 is shown in FIG. It is possible to cause a posture change in the reverse rotation from the rotation direction assumed from the state (counterclockwise in front view).

  Thus, since the rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radially expanded displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and reducing the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction. As a result, it is possible to obtain a complicated movement with a displacement in the rotational direction. Thereby, the effect by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

  The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced simultaneously by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the production standby state has been described. In the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 101, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the downward movement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the player is not obstructed by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12A and FIG. 38).

  In this situation, by reciprocating the linearly moving member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (smallly displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the drive of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  Therefore, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated by energizing the drive motor MT1 intermittently. Thereby, since it becomes unnecessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, control can be facilitated.

  Further, in the aspect in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (minutely displaced) and visually recognized by the player in this way, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can do.

  In addition, the aspect which displaces the collision member 420 in order to vibrate the granular member 320 (small displacement) is not restricted to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably disposed on the lower side of the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. Thereby, it can be avoided that another vibration device receives a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

  The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced simultaneously by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described. In the fifth embodiment, After the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 102, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but an indication of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is fired, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see the vicinity of an angle of 290 degrees).

  Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 may hinder the rotation of the lid member 480, in this embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotating shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480.

  If driving of the drive motor MT1 in the forward rotation direction is continued while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracting side (smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

  On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to prevent the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

  Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the speed is high, the ascending speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

  In this case, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side at the time of launching, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right center portions where the overhang portions 482 are disposed, and firing in the left-right direction. It can be visually recognized so as to become the main person.

  That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between a firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and a firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated backward. Thereby, a variation can be given to the discharge direction of the granular member 320, and an effect can be improved.

  The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 1st Embodiment, although the 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 were provided with the flat substrate and demonstrated the case where light was irradiated to the front-back direction and the left-right direction, in 6th Embodiment, The 1 light irradiation apparatus 6330 and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 6340 are equipped with the electrical decoration board | substrate by which bending arrangement | positioning is carried out. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launch unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Moreover, the direction of the light irradiated from the 1st light irradiation apparatus 6330 or the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 6340 is typically illustrated with the arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiation device 6330 has the front-side end adjacent to the front-side end portion of the electrical decoration substrate 332 and the back-side end portion as the electrical decoration substrate in addition to the electrical decoration substrate 332. The second electrical decoration board 6334 is provided so as to be inclined in a posture away from 332.

  The 2nd electrical decoration board 6334 is provided with light emission means, such as LED arrange | positioned so that light can be irradiated from a front side surface at least. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of staging the granular member 320 that scatters in the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

  The second light irradiation device 6340 is inclinedly arranged in such a posture that the back side end is close to the back side end of the decor substrate 342 and the front side end is separated from the decor substrate 342 in addition to the decor substrate 342. The second electrical decoration substrate 6344 is provided.

  The 2nd electrical decoration board 6344 is provided with light-emitting means, such as LED arrange | positioned so that light can be irradiated from a back side surface at least. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the back side of the launch unit 6300, the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of an electrical decoration board | substrate is not restricted to this. For example, only the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344 may be adopted, and the electric decoration boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. In addition, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

  Further, for the purpose of making the direction of light irradiation oblique, an apparatus capable of changing the attitude of the light emitting means may be configured without taking the method of increasing the electrical decoration substrate. In addition, a light emitting unit may be arranged at the crossing position of the electric decoration boards 332 and 342 and the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344 so that light irradiation is possible.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 to 120, a board box A100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

  105 to 107, arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100. In addition, since it is the same also in each following figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 that cannot be opened (caulking structure). And a sub-cover A500 disposed at an end of the box base A300 and the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400. The main control device includes: a sealing unit A400 connected by the sealing unit A400; A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

  A rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for pivotally supporting the substrate box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and the short direction (arrows U and D) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). Direction) and an axis orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  In addition, the rotation axis A410 is one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (on the opposite side to the first connection wall portion A220 across a covering portion A270 described later). (R direction side). The rotation axis A410 may be disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow L direction side) opposite to one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  The main control device A110 is provided (mounted) with a switch device A120 and a key device A130. The main control device A110 is configured by further arranging (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

  The switch device A120 is operated (turned on) when the operation unit A122 is pushed from the initial position and turned off when the push is released (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

  The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pressing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (turned-on position), and the main control is performed based on the click feeling. The operator can detect completion of input to the device A110. Therefore, it becomes effective when it is necessary to operate in the situation where operation part A122 cannot be visually recognized.

  In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted / removed at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “off position”), and the key A140 inserted at the off position is rotated (right rotation in the present embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as “on”). A key-operated selector switch (mode) which is operated (turned on) by being disposed at a position) and turned off by being rotated (left-rotated in the present embodiment) and disposed at an off position. Switch).

  In the present embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. In addition, the key device A130 can be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed in the on position.

  Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, in a state where the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes (executes RAM erasure) of the main control device A110. In the state in which A130 is turned on, as will be described later, the switch device A120 is configured to function as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”). .

  Here, as described above, the substrate box A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) is connected so as not to be opened, so that the main controller A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130) is operated. Needs to open the substrate box A100, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and labor can be suppressed. Details will be described later.

  Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push-in direction side of the operation unit A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The switch A120 and the key device are protruded by soldering a portion protruding from the front side and protruding to the back side of the leg A121, A131 through a hole opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). A130 is disposed on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  In this case, an external force is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 and the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), and a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R. When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), the leg on one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). A tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, while a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 are broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 are removed from the holes, and the solder is peeled off, which may cause disconnection or poor contact. In contrast, the substrate box A100 employs means for solving such a problem. Details will be described later.

  The main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and these 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display on the 7-segment display device via the box cover A200.

  Here, a setting change method using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

  First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, while the pachinko machine A10 is inserted. Turn on the power. Thereby, it starts as setting change mode, and a setting is changed whenever operation part A122 of switch apparatus A120 is pushed in.

  In the present embodiment, first to sixth six values are defined as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value by pressing the operation unit A122). When the operation unit A122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value.

  The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device. The set value displayed in 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

  In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Other information includes the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. Thus, by using the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the amount of information which can be displayed can be ensured (large) compared with the case where a 7 segment display is used, for example. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve operability and suppress operation mistakes. Further, by combining the device for displaying information related to the game (the third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The set value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the off position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (the set value is determined). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed in response to the detection, and the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is activated.

  After changing the desired setting value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position (that is, kept in the on position), and the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. The normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is also activated by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 in a state where the key A140 of the key device A130 is located at the off position.

  In the setting change mode, the RAM is erased. Such RAM erasure is determined by placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 at the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, timing when the key A140 is arranged at the off position, and the like. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set as appropriate.

  Further, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (while being in the on-position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is removed. When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being placed in the off position, the normal mode is not activated and an error state is displayed, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display at the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the set value set in the setting change mode is confirmed by first turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 at the on position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  The setting value display in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and not displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the off position. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Further, the off edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed in response to the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is activated.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As the predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) blinks at a constant time interval is exemplified.

  In addition, four 7-segment display units are arranged side by side to enable four-digit display, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, “01” in the setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, “02” is displayed, and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two) (for example, the first value is “01” and the second value is “ 02 ”is displayed, and“ 06 ”is displayed for the sixth value).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the substrate box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a plate-like shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and from the four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and lower wall portion A203) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation, the wall portions A201 to A205 are formed in a box shape whose back side is opened. The box cover A200 is made of a light transmissive resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  Two steps are formed on the standing tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The first step (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second step is formed on the outer side of the first surface (the side opposite to the inner space). A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and the surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface A206”). It is formed as).

  The seating surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. The four corners of the seating surface A206 (parts where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the walls A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a in which female threads are threaded on the inner periphery. Is done.

  Therefore, the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of the front surface in contact with the seating surface A206, and the screw ASC (see FIG. 5) inserted through the insertion hole A112 of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening hole A206a to be fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201. Stored.

  A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 at a predetermined interval. The engagement piece A207 extends from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B) and extends in one direction (in the direction of arrow R) from the standing tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape that is bent in an approximately L shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

  A portion of the front wall portion A201 that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) is formed in a part thereof. Such a recessed portion includes a plate-like operation wall portion A210 that is positioned backward from the front wall portion A201 to the back side (main controller 110 side), and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is connected to the front wall portion. It is formed in the front wall part A201 by the plate-shaped wall part (1st connection wall part A220, 2nd connection wall part A230, and 3rd connection wall part A240) connected to A201.

  That is, the outer surface on the front side of the substrate box A100 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first region. And a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

  The operation wall portion A210 is a portion that forms an operation surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in the front view (the length in the directions of the arrows L and R with respect to the length dimension in the directions of the arrows U and D). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are increased, and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

  Note that the operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

  The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, a space continuous with the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220. The space (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) as a whole can be expanded as a space that includes the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, coexistence with expansion of the space in the front side (arrow F direction side) of operation wall part A210 and securing of the space in the inside of substrate box A100 can be aimed at.

  The second connection wall portion A230 is on one side in the short side direction (arrow U direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and the third connection wall portion A240 is on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side on the direction side) is a wall portion connected to the front wall portion A201, and is arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

  The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation unit A122 to the outside of the substrate box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 for enabling connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119) are formed.

  The opening A250 has a shape in front view corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, substantially square in front view), and is substantially in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210. Located in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation portion A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (a direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). It is a part for restricting (falling), and is formed in a frame shape of a substantially square shape surrounding the opening A250, and its inner peripheral surface is formed so as to be smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

  In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the front end of the operation unit A122 pushed to the operating position (turned-on position). The tip is set at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (arrow F direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it can avoid that pushing operation of operation part A122 is inhibited by guide wall A251, and can aim at improvement in operativity of operation part A122.

  However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is higher than the distal end of the operation portion A122 pushed to the operating position (turned-on position). The position may be set to a dimension (the tip of the operation part A122 is immersed inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operation position due to an operator's careless operation or contact (interference) with other members.

  In addition, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is substantially the same as the height of the standing edge from the operation wall portion A210. You may set to the dimension used as the same height position. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in, the finger is brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed into the operating position with reference to the contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  A covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112 (a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. Part A271 and a plate-like end face wall part A272 that closes the protruding tip of the peripheral wall part A271 (forms an end face), and a part on the tip side of the key device A130 is housed in the internal space. The

  The peripheral wall portion A271 has a base A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions protruding radially outward from two opposing positions (positions whose phases are approximately 180 degrees different) of the base A271a. Part A271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion portion A271b) is formed in substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (the directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same shape as the sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion portion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two opposing portions of the circular shape protrude radially outward). Are formed (see FIG. 110B).

  The opening A260 is formed in the protruding front end surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end surface wall portion A272. Thereby, end surface wall part A272 is formed in the plate shape extended in the radial direction inner side from the internal peripheral surface of the protrusion front-end | tip of peripheral wall part A271. That is, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever) whose base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and whose one end (opening A260 side) is free.

  Here, the opening A260 is only in a region corresponding to a displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position (a region necessary for permitting the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

  As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a that extends radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). And a rectangular portion A272b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The square portion A272b is disposed in a posture that tapers radially inward in a front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), and is formed at two locations whose phases are different by approximately 180 degrees.

  Note that the key A140 has a dimension in which the rotation radius of the portion on one side of the rotation center and the rotation radius of the portion on the other side of the rotation center are different. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. These 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212 are protrusions extended in the shape of a stripe, maintaining substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected with the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of coating | coated part A270. .

  Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and the second One end of the protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge portion of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at a position where the phase is different by approximately 180 degrees.

  Further, on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, the display portion is located at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. Are formed respectively. The display unit is a part indicating information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and “OFF” and “ON” are displayed. That is, the key A140 having a posture with the edge directed toward one end of the first ridge A211 is disposed at the off position (see FIG. 115A), and the key having a posture with the edge directed toward one end of the second ridge A212. A140 is arranged at the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in a line) in series (in a line) along the edge of the front wall portion A201.

  Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284, and these standing walls A281, A282, A283, and A284 are opened. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110B). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

  The first standing wall A281 is disposed between the opening A250 and the second connection wall part A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall part A230 and the lower wall part A203. The second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are disposed to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A281. The fourth standing wall A284 is disposed between the opening A250 and the lower wall part A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first standing wall A281.

  As for 2nd standing wall A282 and 3rd standing wall A283, one side is connected with 1st standing wall A281, and the other side is connected with lower wall part A203, respectively. That is, the first standing wall A281 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected on one side to the second standing wall A282 and on the other side to the third standing wall A283.

  The standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by the standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (See (b)). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

  The first standing wall A291 is disposed between the opening A260 and the second connection wall part A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall part A230 and the lower wall part A203. The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A291.

  As for 2nd standing wall A292 and 3rd standing wall A293, one side is connected with 1st standing wall A291 and the other side is connected with lower wall part A203, respectively. That is, the first standing wall A291 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected on one side to the second standing wall A292 and on the other side to the third standing wall A293.

  The standing wall A290 is formed to have a size (a position outside the covering portion A270) that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is on the inner surface (straight line) of the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The outer surfaces (arcs) of the protrusions A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 are inscribed in contact with the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

  The first upright walls A281, A291, the second upright walls A282, A292, and the third upright walls A283, A293 of the upright walls A280, A290 are the back surface (inner surface, in the direction of arrow B in the direction of arrow B). The standing height from each of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is the seating surface A206. Placed at the same height.

  Accordingly, the standing walls A280 and A290 are such that the standing front end surfaces of the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293 are connected to the seating surface A206, and the seating surface A206 and each of the standing walls A281 and A293 are provided. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (form the same plane). Thus, when main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to box cover A200 (seat surface A206), first standing walls A281, A291, second standing walls A282, A292, and third standing walls are installed. The standing front end surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 is in contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimensions (arrow U and D direction dimensions) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are the same as the length dimensions (arrows L and L) of the first standing wall A281. R dimension (size in the R direction). Therefore, as described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280 (the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283), the second standing wall There is a possibility that A282 and the third standing wall A283 are deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 cannot be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the space between the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall are connected. The deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the fourth standing wall A284 is disposed at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, so that the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 is increased. This corresponds to the partial formation of a part with a large plate thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, defective molding at a part with a large plate thickness dimension and its vicinity. Cause it to occur.

  On the other hand, the standing height of the fourth standing wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the standing height of the first standing wall A281, the second standing wall A282, and the third standing wall A283. Thereby, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second upright wall A282 and the third upright wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth upright wall A284 is reduced, and the molding failure due to the difference in shrinkage rate Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall part A203, the switch device A120 can be prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, and the tilt can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilted at a smaller angle than the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

  On the inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290, the front end side (arrow B The taper surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that are closer to the outer surface side, are formed in the direction (direction). As a result, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the standing tip of each standing wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is gradually reduced toward the standing tip, and accordingly, each standing wall A281 is correspondingly increased. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293, the area of the standing tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

  The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are placed on the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the standing tip side of the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

  A standing wall A208 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the above-described standing walls A280 and A290, a standing wall A209 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The standing wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which four side plate-like bodies are connected and the opposite side to the front wall portion A201 is opened, and is mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) (MPU201, FIG. 4)). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape that is open on the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, and is mounted on the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at a position corresponding to. Therefore, in a state where the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208 and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

  Here, in the plurality of standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 that respectively surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the standing front end surface of one or the plurality of standing walls is the standing position of the remaining standing walls. A height position different from the height position of the tip surface is set. In the present embodiment, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to be). Thus, even when there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). Compared with the standing wall A209, the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily adhered to the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the close contact of the standing wall surrounding the highly important object with the printed circuit board A119.

  Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111 (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 has a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate-like shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and stands from the four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). And a wall portion (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting these upper wall portion A302 and lower wall portion A303) formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 are formed in a box shape whose front side is open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  A plurality of engaged portions A307 are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engagement piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (arrow D direction side).

  As for the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 is opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion (the arrow L direction side) by the extension length of the extension portion. Face each other at the shifted position and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307, so that the box cover A200 is then attached to the box base A300 in the extending direction of the extending portion of the engaging piece A207 ( Slide and move in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engagement piece A207 enters the back side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (the displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114, main controller A110 will be described. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main view in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partial expansion front perspective view of control apparatus A110.

  114A is a front view of main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112A, and FIG. 114B is main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114A. 114 (c) is a side view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114 (a).

  In FIG. 112 to FIG. 114, only the main ones of various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are shown and the other illustrations are omitted to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. .

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and a circuit (pattern) for connecting the electronic components is a conductor such as a copper foil. The insertion holes A112 are formed at four corners.

  The printed circuit board A119 is in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the arrow F direction side) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). It is stored in.

  In this case, at least the regions AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 where the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 in the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abut (FIG. 114). (See (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In FIG. 114 (a), only the portion connected to the standing walls A280 and A290 in the region where the seating surface A206 is in contact is shown.

  The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation portion A122 so that the operation portion A122 can be displaced (push-in operation), and a coil spring that is disposed inside the main body A123 and applies a biasing force to return the operation portion A122 to the initial position. An urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and switched in accordance with the displacement of the operation portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

  The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b protruding from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A123a. The outer diameter dimension of the projection A123b is larger than the maximum dimension (length of the diagonal line) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). In a state where main controller A110 is housed in substrate box A100, the front surface of projection A123b and the back surface of operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) face each other.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a where the leg A121 protrudes) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the projection A123b and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, you may comprise so that the front of protrusion A123b and the back surface (surface of the arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210 may contact | abut.

  The leg A121 protrudes from the back surface of the base A123a in the main body A123 (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. Thereby, the switch device A120 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The key device A130 includes a cylinder part A132 formed as a lock that allows the inner cylinder A132a to rotate with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder part A132 is disposed therein. The main body A133 that is held, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the contact that is switched according to the state of the cylinder portion A132 (the rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a relative to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

  The main body A133 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has a base A133a that holds the cylinder part A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) and two locations on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a (positions whose phases are different by approximately 180 degrees). ) And a pair of protrusions A133b protruding radially outward, and an end A133c that forms an end surface on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base A133a.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and the leg A131 protrudes) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. In other words, the main body A133 may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

  The end surface on the arrow F direction side of the protrusion A133b is formed at a position (arrow B direction side) one step lower than the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end A133c is formed with a circular opening in front view at a position substantially concentric with the base A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. .

  In a state where the main controller A110 is stored in the substrate box A100, a part of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is stored in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

  Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value that is equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is covered with The base A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271, so that the base A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271.

  In this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface (end surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. In addition, you may comprise so that the front surface of edge part A133c and the back surface of end surface wall part A272 may contact | abut.

  The leg A131 protrudes from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The support A134 is formed with a base portion A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center, and the main body A133 (base A133a and protrusion A133b) is inserted into the opening, and two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b extending and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are integrated by bending a metal plate. Formed.

  The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extension portion A134b. Is brought into contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. A leg A134b1 protrudes from the extended distal end surface of the extended portion A134b. The support A134 is disposed and self-supported on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 by soldering a portion where the leg A134b1 is inserted from the front side into a hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 and protrudes to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

  Note that a gap may be provided between the extended front end surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extended portion A134b and the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

  On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending front end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to contact the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the main body A133 can be more securely suppressed from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Moreover, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, penetrate | invade into the leg A131 side of key apparatus A130.

  Further, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed in a cross-sectional shape bent in a substantially U shape or a substantially S shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as composition to do. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 using the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since the soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the legs A134b1 with the holes, soldering may be performed. It can suppress more firmly that leg A134b1 comes out from a hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

  The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (arrow L and B direction dimensions, dimension in FIG. 114 (b) left and right direction) larger than the thickness dimension of the plate-like body constituting the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased, and when the tilt of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extending portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

  However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be a square shape.

  Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to regulate bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. Thereby, since the rigidity as the whole support body A134 can be improved and the function which supports the main body A133 can be improved, the inclination with respect to the printed circuit board A119 of the main body A133 can be controlled more firmly (suppression).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the substrate box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a substrate box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of the arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partial expanded side view of the board | substrate box A100 in the arrow CXVIb direction view.

  117A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 117B is a substrate along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115A. FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of substrate box A100 in section line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

  FIG. 119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is the substrate at the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of box A100.

  117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatching is attached to the cross section, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are schematically illustrated. This is illustrated schematically.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the substrate box A100 has a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is protrudingly provided. Opening A260 is formed in end surface wall part A272 which forms a tip surface (surface by the side of arrow F). Thereby, it is difficult to make the tip of a foreign object such as a wire reach the opening A260.

  For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by a person who performs fraud due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire is placed on the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding to the opening A260 by sliding on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the wall portion A210) is performed.

  In contrast, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210 because the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. Further, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271), and further progression (sliding) can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of a foreign object such as a wire. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening A260 can be suppressed.

  The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main controller A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path (a gap between the end surface wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and a peripheral wall portion A271) through which the foreign object such as the wire passes. A path formed by a gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) and a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire abuts (a wire passing through a gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, etc.) A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 through a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (the lateral dimension in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) is the inner diameter dimension (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) of the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271). Larger than the horizontal dimension).

  Thereby, the upper surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the support A134 can be made to face the inner surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (formed by a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b). The wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (the wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection A133b abuts, that is, the support A134. In addition, for the foreign matter such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by abutting against the upper surface of the support A134, each of the standing walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) is formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

  Thereby, the outer surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the protrusion A271b can face each other. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign object such as a wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b). The tip of the wire or the like that passes along the circumferential direction through the wall between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b. Wall, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being cheated by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  In the switching device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (the length of the diagonal line) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the projection A123b can be made to face the inner surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of guide wall A251 and operation wall part A210, and the outer surface of switch apparatus A120 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, a path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251 and the operation wall part A210, the operation part A122, and the protrusion A123b). A wall where the tip of a foreign object such as a wire abuts (a wall where the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation portion A122 abuts, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b, and for the foreign matter such as a wire whose advancing direction is changed by contacting the upper surface of the protrusion A123b, the inner wall of each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall portion A203) Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by the inserted foreign matter such as a wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

  As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to the operator's inadvertent or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, due to the collision of other members with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in a direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, and tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted).

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the breakage and bending of the leg A131, the disconnection of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed board A119, and the peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  The covering portion A270 is formed with an end surface wall portion A272 at the protruding tip (arrow F direction side), and this end surface wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, in addition to the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which a foreign substance such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and improperly applied to the main controller A110.

  In particular, the end face wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has a square portion A272b extending radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, only the area where the key A140 is allowed to be displaced (the area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140) is opened on the protruding front end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the covering part A270, and the covering part A270 is protrudingly provided. All other regions of the front end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) are end surface wall portions A272. Accordingly, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end surface wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire passes therethrough. Can be difficult.

  Thus, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end surface wall portion A272 is relatively complicated with the pair of square portions A272b projecting from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. It is formed in a simple shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and rectangular portion A272b) is a cantilever having a plate shape with a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extending tip) is free). Therefore, the shape can be simplified and the moldability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end surface wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the peripheral wall portion A271 is the opening A260. Even when the external force in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress tilting of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting distal end side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end surface wall portion A272 (portion forming the opening A260). Can be brought into contact with each other. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end wall A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted), and breakage of the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

  Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is stored on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer circumferential surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b and the inner circumferential surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b face each other. (See FIG. 118 (a)).

  Therefore, for example, due to the operator's inadvertent or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, due to the collision of other members with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b is the circumferential inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b. ) To restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the breakage and bending of the leg A131, the disconnection of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed board A119, and the peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  Here, for example, the operator's inadvertent operation or rough operation on the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or the operation unit A122 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, an external force in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R) is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140 due to a collision of another member with the key A140. When acted, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 tilts, and the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

  On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erected walls A280 and A290 have their standing tip surfaces ( The surface on the arrow B direction side) is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119 (see FIGS. 117A and 117B).

  Thereby, in addition to the improvement of the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 due to the standing walls A280 and A290 being erected (functioning as ribs), the support portion (deformation suppression) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as means. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing walls A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted). That is, the portion that abuts against the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses the tilt is shared not only with the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is accordingly increased. Can be dispersed. Also from this point, the breakage of the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed board A119 because the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed board A119, The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it can suppress that fraud is added to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118B). That is, the region AS1 where the standing end surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction) of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction) of the printed board A119 are in contact. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

  Therefore, a path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the standing walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the outward movement is restricted from the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall part A203. Can do. Thereby, it can suppress that fraud is added to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Further, the standing walls A280 and A290 are formed so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be improved, but also the direction of the external force applied to the operation portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R can be changed). Even if an external force in any direction within the plane including the surface acts), the function as the support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be surely exhibited. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  The first upright wall A291 is arranged in a posture that is orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and the second upright wall A292 and the second upright wall A292. The three standing walls A293 are arranged in a posture that is orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be efficiently exhibited on the standing wall A290.

  That is, when the external force in the direction of the arrow U, D or the direction of the arrow L, R among the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R is applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (the load resistance that the standing wall A290 should exhibit as a support portion) is maximized, an external force in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle with the directions of arrows U and D or arrows L and R is applied. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 is rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 exhibits as a support portion as much as the external force escapes by the rotation). The load capacity) should be low. As a result, by setting the posture of the standing wall A290 to the above-described arrangement, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

  Since the standing walls A280, A290 (second standing walls A282, A292 and third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the standing wall is utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the box cover A200. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall part A210 and the lower wall part A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as the support portions (deformation suppressing means) that support the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  In the printed board A119, the surface on which the electronic components are connected by solder is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with the regions AS1 and AS2 (see FIG. 114 (a)). , AS2 is formed as a flat surface.

  Therefore, the standing front end surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 are easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the standing walls A280 and A290 It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between printed circuit boards A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be surely functioned as walls against which the tips of foreign matters such as wires inserted from the openings A250 and A260 come into contact.

  The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the standing tips The area of the surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, the surface pressure at the standing tip surface abutted against the printed circuit board A119 is increased, and the insertion of foreign matters such as wires from between the printed circuit board A119 and the standing walls A280 and A290 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the taper surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces (surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) of the standing walls A280 and A290, the moldability is improved. Meanwhile, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

  That is, the shape of the standing walls A280 and A290 is reduced by reducing the area of the standing tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the standing tip side (arrow B direction). The fluidity of the resin in the mold can be secured by making the change moderate. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

  Further, when the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( 117 (a) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-described groove. In other words, it is difficult to pass between the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of substrate box A100.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115 (a) and FIG. 115 ( b)).

  Thereby, the 1st protrusion A211 and the 2nd protrusion A212 are functioned as a rib for improving rigidity, and the coating | coated part A270 can be supported by the 1st protrusion A211 and the 2nd protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the tilt of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is further increased by utilizing the rigidity of the protrusions A211 and 222. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to coating | coated part A270 can be suppressed.

  Further, on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, the display portion is located at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. ("ON" and "OFF") are formed respectively. Thereby, the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit can be shared by the first and second protrusions A211 and A212. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface of the key A140 in the off position (the surface gripped by the finger). The same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) as that of the narrow surface along the outer edge (see FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second protrusion A212 is the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface on the arrow U direction side (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ), The first protrusion A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the ON position. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the position and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface on the arrow L direction side is in contact with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), The second protrusion A212 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a portion where the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). Portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the external force in the direction opposite to that described above (the force that displaces key A140 in the direction of arrow D) acts on key A140 in the off position by second connection wall portion A230 (FIG. 115 (a )), The external force in the direction opposite to that described above (the force for displacing the key A140 in the direction of the arrow R) acts on the key A140 in the ON position can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). (See (b)).

  That is, as will be described later, the operation wall A210 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow U, D direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region) (arrow D, arrow D). The direction side) is open (no connection wall is formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key device A130 to the third portion. The distance to connection wall part A240 is enlarged.

  Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the operator's hand and other configurations on the space side collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is moved to the arrow D. An external force that is displaced in the direction or the direction of the arrow L is easily applied. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side that suppresses tilting of the key device A130 with respect to such external force (receiving side), it is possible to reduce material costs and ensure rigidity. Can be done efficiently.

  As described above, the square portion A272b of the end wall portion A272 is disposed in two places whose phases are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the lengths of the two sides (outer edge, the edge forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as an unequal triangular shape).

  Specifically, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the off position is a side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. The rectangular portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite side across the key A140) than the key A140 in the off position is longer (larger) than the key A140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the side is shortened (decreased) (see FIG. 115A).

  Therefore, in other words, the rectangular portion A272b on the side close to the first connection wall portion A220 is the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position. Is shortened (smaller), and the rectangular part A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall part A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension on the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, the presence of the space on the open side and the space on the third connection wall A240 side causes the operator's hand and other configurations on the space side to collide with the key A140, and the key A140. Where an external force that causes displacement in the direction of arrow D or arrow L is likely to be applied, according to the square portion A272b in this embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilt of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed, and the breakage of the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

  An outer surface on the front side (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the substrate box A100 is a first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall that is located closer to the main controller A110 than the first region. The openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

  Accordingly, the openings A250 and A260 are disposed at positions recessed from the outer surface of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall part A220, second connection wall part A230, and third connection wall part A240) to be arranged can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. Thereby, compared with the case where opening A250, A260 is formed in front wall part A201 (1st field), while being able to carry out fraud, the distance to opening A250, A260 can be made long, and It is difficult to visually recognize the openings A250 and A260, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260.

  Here, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 is a distance between the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space). )) Must be secured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability is deteriorated.

  In this case, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), so that the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily secured, and as described above, the openings A250, It can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of substrate box A100 from A260. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) that connect the first region and the second region work. The operator's (operator's) hands interfere and interfere with the operation. For this reason, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. Thus, the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R) in the front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B) and the other direction (arrows U and D) orthogonal to the one direction. It is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular shape (horizontal rectangle) in front view larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115A and 115B).

  The key device A130 is arranged so that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is the posture along the other direction (arrow U, D direction) described above (see FIG. 115 (a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position has the surface to be gripped by the finger facing the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the front view (viewed in the arrow B direction). Is a posture along the short direction (arrow U, D direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  Thereby, a space can be secured on the side (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115 (a)) where the surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, a finger (for example, thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region (first connection wall). Interference with the part A220, the second connection wall part A230, and the third connection wall part A240) can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connecting wall A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). As described above, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, when the key A140 is gripped with a finger and operated (rotated from the off position to the on position or vice versa), the key A140 is It can suppress that the finger different from the finger to hold | grips interferes in the level | step difference (1st connection wall part A220, 2nd connection wall part A230, and 3rd connection wall part A240) which connects a 1st area | region and a 2nd area | region. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  For example, when gripping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger or the ring finger can be arranged using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the heel key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

  When holding the key A140 in the ON position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger are formed with the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the key device A130 is operated. Arranged using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by being positioned on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the wall portion A210 (second region). When the key A140 is operated (rotated) from the off position to the on position, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above. it can.

  In the switch device A120, the position of the protruding tip surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation portion A122 in the initial position (the height of standing from the operation wall portion A210) is such that the covering portion A270 protrudes. It is set to a position (small size) lower than the position (the height of standing from the operation wall A210) of the front end surface (the front surface of the end wall A272, the surface on the arrow F direction side). Therefore, it is possible to suppress interference between the operation unit A122 and the finger when operating the key A140.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) includes connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall on both sides of the longitudinal side in the arrow L direction) and the other side (in the arrow R direction side 9). Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (arrow U direction side), while on the other side in the short direction (arrow D direction side). The connection surface is not formed.

  Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) of the transversal direction in operation wall part A210 (2nd area | region) can be open | released. That is, the opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the external space. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with a finger and performing an operation (insertion into the key device A130, extraction from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Use the space (external space) communicated to the above-mentioned opening as a space for placing and moving (moving) a finger (little finger or ring finger) different from the gripped finger (for example, thumb and index finger). Can do. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the board box A100 has a distance (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) in consideration of heat radiation from the main controller A110. (Distance (internal space)).

  In this case, steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are composed of the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  That is, by tilting the first connection wall portion A220 downward, the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are connected to each other while suppressing interference with fingers and improving the operability of the key device A130. By making it non-inclined (by making only the first connecting wall portion A220 to be inclined downward), the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for accommodating heat radiation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

  In this way, even when only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, the interference with the fingers could be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and one side from the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (the first connection wall portion A220 side) ) By adopting a configuration in which the key device A130 is arranged close to.

  The third connection wall portion A240 is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220). The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 during manufacturing.

  120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, and shows a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Only the main components are labeled.

  As shown in FIG. 120, as described above, in the pachinko machine A10, hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable to the front front side, with the side provided with the opening / closing axis.

  Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening / closing axis, the release angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, approximately 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 120). In the case where the opening angle can be secured), the operator stands at a position facing the front of the substrate box A100, so that the switch device A120 and the key device are as described above (the procedure described in FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated, and its operability can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, the opening angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, and the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are brought into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the opening. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured even when it is necessary to operate the key device A130.

  That is, the substrate box A100 has a direction in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115A) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). And the short direction (the direction of arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed to the direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and one side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow on FIG. 115 (a)). (L direction side) is arranged in a posture to be positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is disposed on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

  Thereby, when the hand is inserted from the space between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (front surface of the substrate box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second region), A space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the palm near the thumb and the base of the thumb. The space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) Can be placed using

  With this arrangement, the switch device A120 can be operated (pressed) with the thumb or index finger on the operation unit A122, and the key device A130 can be rotated when the key A140 is rotated. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and index finger holding the key A140, a space secured by tilting the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

  Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the substrate box A100 is rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 120 around the rotation axis A410. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned on the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis. Also good. Accordingly, the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the substrate box A100 at a position where the operator does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or the like in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIGS. 115 to 119). The key device A130 can be operated, and its operability can be ensured.

  In this case, the main control device A110 (input / output port 205) is connected to various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first through the openings AOP1 to AOP8. 1 symbol display device 37, 2nd symbol display device 83, 2nd symbol hold lamp 84, refer to FIG. 4), the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line is connected to one end.

  Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of the plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 There is a risk of deteriorating sex.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, whether or not the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line whose one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected, released, or connected and released together) ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is secured to the main control device A110, and fraud can be suppressed. Is connected to the main controller A110 with other electrical connection lines (dispensing control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84). Even if the electrical connection line) is released (unplugged) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed to improve workability (ensure versatility). ).

  That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis, the main control device A110 is rotated (main control is performed on the electrical connection line). It is necessary to release (remove) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted.

  Therefore, if all the electrical connection lines are not connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is placed at a predetermined position (switch device) in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line released (removed) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110 after being rotated to a position where the operation of the A120 and the key device A130 can be easily performed.

  In particular, when the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, it is released (removed) with an extension line interposed. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main control device A110, which increases labor.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if predetermined electrical connection lines (electrical connection lines connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) are connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (dispensing control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) It is possible to eliminate the need to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 via an extension line.

  As a result, the main control device A110 can be arranged at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is reduced. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described. However, the end surface wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a protrusion A2273 from the back surface. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 121A is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121A. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), only a portion viewed in cross-section is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 121, a protrusion A2273 protrudes from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and the outer edge of the end surface wall part A2272 (the tip in the overhanging direction protruding radially inward from the peripheral wall part A271) (Side edge) in a predetermined range.

  Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposite) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A133 of the key device A130 and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. The range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the position AP4 and the position AP6 including the position AP5) and one side (inward in the radial direction from the peripheral wall portion A271) with the square portion A272b interposed therebetween. And a range along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4), and in this range (a range between the position AP1 and the position AP6) It is formed continuously.

  The projecting dimension from the back surface of the end face wall part A2272 (annular part A272a and square part A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and from the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes to, and gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and the position AP2 is set to the same value as the position AP3. Similarly, the projecting dimension is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP5 to the position AP6. The position AP6 has the same value as the position AP4. Is set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projecting dimension).

  As described above, the protrusion A2273 protrudes from the end surface wall portion A2272, so that the rigidity of the end surface wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R) is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, and the key device A130 is tilted. When the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end surface wall portion A2272, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Since the protrusion A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposite) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133) are formed. ) Can be reduced, and foreign matter such as wire can be prevented from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protruding dimension in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 so that the back surface of the end surface wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing interval between them. Therefore, the projecting tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is brought into contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

  This eliminates a gap between the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133), and a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, at the positions AP2 and AP5, since the protruding dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square part A272b formed as a plate shape (cantilever) in which the outer edge side is free is used. Thus, the protrusion A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and in the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly attached to the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). Thereby, it can suppress more reliably that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of the board | substrate box A2100 from the clearance gap between the back surface of end surface wall part A2272 and the front surface of key apparatus A130 (end part A133c of main body A133). .

  Further, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is in contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130. Even when the end surface wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being deformed in the insertion direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the base end side (side connected with peripheral wall part A271) of end surface wall part A2272 is damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (the arrow R direction side) than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). In the ninth embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are disposed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine A3010. FIG. 122B shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122 (b), only a main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (covering part A270, key in the operation wall part A210). The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) are different, but the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) where the operation wall portion A210 is farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the working wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

  An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. Is done.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the arrow L direction side). That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

  Here, the substrate box A3100 is disposed at the first position (during game) where the movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. Position (refer to FIG. 120) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and a second position in which the front of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010 ( That is, it is set to a range of approximately 180 ° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122B).

  Accordingly, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing information (for example, information on setting change, setting value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. )be able to. As a result, since it can be operated while confirming the display (information), it is possible to easily grasp the operation states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) can be placed on the back side (that is, the position hardly visible from the outside, see FIG. 120). (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrows). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position where a desired posture (B direction) (a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel in this embodiment) is obtained. In addition, it is preferable that the angle which the front of operation wall part A210 and the display surface of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 make is set in the range of about 0 degree to about 45 degrees.

  That is, the board is located at a position where the surface (front side of the operation wall portion A210) on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to eliminate the necessity of taking an unreasonable posture such as turning the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010. .

  As a result, it is easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information related to setting change), improving operability and operating errors. Can be more reliably achieved.

  Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200 (arrow L direction side), and the switch device A120 and the key are provided on the operation wall portion A210. Apparatus A130 is provided.

  As a result, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed. Therefore, it can suppress that the finger which operates switch apparatus A120 (operation part A122) and key apparatus A130 (key A140) interferes with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pushing operation of the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 having a higher operation frequency than the key device A130 is located farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, closer to the first connection wall portion A220). Arranged. Thereby, switch device A120 with high operation frequency can be arrange | positioned in the position (FIG. 122 (b) right side) farther from the outer edge of pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). Therefore, it can suppress more reliably that the finger which operates switch apparatus A120 (operation part A122) interferes with the outer edge of pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when the switch device A120 (operation portion A122) is operated. It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point.

  Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 reaches the second position described above (a position where the front of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122B). When displaced (rotated), the substrate box A3100 is engaged, and displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is restricted (that is, the substrate box A3100 is fixed at the second position). ) Is provided. Accordingly, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are operated, it is not necessary to hold the substrate box A3100 by hand, so that the operability can be improved.

  Note that the restricting means uses a magnetic force (attraction force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the substrate box A3100 at the second position (the force exceeding the attraction force is applied, so that the first Displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position is permitted), and includes a protruding member that is disposed at the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is disposed at the protruding position. The projected member engaged with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and restricting displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 (biasing means from the projected position) When the projecting member is immersed against the urging force, displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is permitted.

  Next, a substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the substrate box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrow U, D direction) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It arrange | positions with the attitude | position along the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction) of the pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a front view of the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123B is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. FIG. 123B shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. A (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated in broken lines. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), only a main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and orientation) and the number of arrangement of the rotation axis A4410, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 that project from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 in directions away from each other. The pair of rotation shafts A4410 is located on one side of the substrate box A4100 in the short direction (arrow U, D direction) (on the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, arrow U direction), and in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (arrow (L, R direction) formed so as to project outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged on the same axis.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 is disposed at a first position (during game) where the movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. Position (a position indicated by a broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (arrow B direction), and the front of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90 ° up to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most to the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). .

  Accordingly, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is present. In addition, the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A <b> 210 can face the back surface of another component arranged on the inner frame 12. Therefore, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be faced with different parts, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized operation (the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated).

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 is applied to another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be placed at the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, unauthorized acquisition of the key A140 forgotten to be removed can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located below the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), and thus the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. In the state where the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it can be made easy for an operator to recognize that the substrate box A4100 is in a state in which it cannot be placed at the first position.

  Note that the separate member is such that, in a state where the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is located on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 rather than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape that penetrates. Thereby, the space formed in the front side of operation wall part A210 can be made small, and it can suppress that switch apparatus A120 and key apparatus A130 are operated illegally.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the ball | bowl which flows down the ball | bowl flow-down unit 150 was decelerated by the protruding part 154, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, an adhesive member may be provided on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, or air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the effect member 700, and the projecting width to the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

  In this case, by disposing the main body 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 in a state where the overhanging width is long, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated. it can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring the operation member 183 so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state where the overhang width is shortened. The displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement restricting device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the player can visually recognize the displacement restricting device 180 and produce an effect.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by a manual operation has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operation member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restriction release state prior to the initial operation after the power is turned on, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is prevented from starting to be displaced while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

  Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be disposed around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. In addition, a detection sensor that can detect the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and it is determined by the detection sensor that the displacement restricting device 180 is in a restricted state. Alternatively, it may be controlled not to start driving of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be disposed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be disposed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof.

  For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and the upper side of the back case 510 is provided. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is extended, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630, thereby preventing the lower arm member 630 from changing in the left-right direction. Can do.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of a device that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, by providing a device for restricting (limiting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, the partition member 310 may be rubbed against the wall surface, and the granular member 320 may be prevented from being cracked or the partition member 310 being scratched.

  For example, it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480 by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side (effect standby state). Therefore, the range of the partition member 310 that can contact the granular member 320 at the time of shipment can be limited, and the amount of displacement of the granular member 320 can be suppressed. it can.

  As another example, the granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate effecting unit 160, is configured to be able to project into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is disposed in the internal space IE1 in a projecting state. You may provide the overhang | projection member comprised so that a displacement of this can be restrict | limited.

  This overhanging member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and configured to switch between the overhanging state and the non-extending state each time the pushing operation is performed. After installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the state change of the overhang member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similarly to the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between the claws.

  As another example, the arrangement of the granular member 320 may be maintained by shipping the partition member 310 with the internal pressure increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store and lowering the air pressure in the partition member 310 before operating, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

  As another example, a ferromagnetic metal powder may be mixed with the resin used as the material of the granular member 320, and a magnet may be disposed near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the granular member 320 can be maintained with the magnetic force of a magnet at the time of shipment. On the other hand, at the time of operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be made free by removing this magnet.

  In addition, a magnet is not restricted to what needs to be removed at the time of operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

  In the aspect in which the ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, after the firing effect is performed, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, the magnet is brought close to the partition member 310). By disposing the actuating effect item that operates, it is possible to include an effect mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visualized as if it is floating).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an insertion hole formed on the same straight line as the central axis of the restricted hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed at a predetermined terminal position is formed in the rear case 510. The metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole, fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, the store clerk at the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

  On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the fixing tape, and it is not possible to discard the metal bar or the resin bar for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and store it. It becomes necessary to do.

  In addition, if the storage of metal bars or resin bars is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured when delivered to other stores without metal bars or resin bars. It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that an improvement on this viewpoint is the displacement regulating device 180 fastened and fixed to the back case 510.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left and right central part 312b of the curved plate part 312 and the rear partition lower part 314 are approximately the same has been described. is not. For example, the front-rear width between the left and right central part 312b and the back partition lower part 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front and rear width between the left and right part 312a and the back partition lower part 314. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased below the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the granular member 320 to be ejected can be reduced. The probability that the granular member 320 is damaged or damaged by the collision can be reduced.

  Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left and right portions 312a and the rear partition lower portion 314 may be increased to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be caused to enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be ejected.

  Further, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 need not be constant. For example, it is good also as a shape which tapers as it goes to the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. FIG. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it can be easily avoided that an excessive load is locally generated in the partition member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapering direction toward the front side, the scattered granular member 320 can be easily moved toward the front side.

  Further, for example, a knob-like portion that protrudes in a manner that protrudes toward the back side may be provided at a part of the front plate portion 311 where the injected granular member 320 is predicted to reach together. good. This knob-shaped portion may be configured such that another member is disposed and fixed on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or gold so that a part of the front plate portion 311 can be projected to the back side. You may comprise so that a convex part may be provided in a type | mold.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is configured in the shape of a soccer ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are three-dimensionally formed) may be used. Since it is possible to create a gap between the members by configuring the members with a certain size, the granular member 320 can be scattered violently when the firing effect is executed.

  In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and fires the granular member 320 diagonally forward and upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be the left and right positions of the light guide plate 161 or the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute an effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. In addition, when arrange | positioning the injection apparatus 400 in an upper position, it is preferable to add the apparatus which lifts the granular member 320 to an effect stand-by position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed from a single-color (in this embodiment, red) resin member has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by considering the position of the center of gravity and changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

  The number of granular members 320 is not limited and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as that of the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320 and a concave curved shape similar to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. This changes the way the granular member 320 jumps and looks when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape well fitted and when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the granular member 320 is arranged to be able to fly in the internal space IE1 and gathers on the collision member 420 by gravity. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an urging unit that urges the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (the position side in the effect standby state) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging unit. May be. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

  Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

  The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the granular member 320 and the biasing means are bonded may be used, or the bonded member is not separated but not separated, and a part of the biasing means is disposed inside the granular member 320 and is integrated. The biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being distant from the granular member 320.

  Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, an atmospheric pressure adjusting means for adjusting the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 may be adopted in the same manner as the gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the pressure in the internal space IE1.

  For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased in such a manner that gas is injected into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely the upper side of the internal space IE1. When the pressure in the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the granular member 320, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side, up, down, left, and right.

  In addition, when producing a pressure change, it is preferable to block the deformed through portion 315. It is possible to easily give the lid member 480 the function of closing the deformed through portion 315. For example, when a deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) that is flexible, thin and highly deformable is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, according to the displacement with respect to the unusual penetration part 315 of the cover member 480, the irregular penetration part 315 can be obstruct | occluded or open | released.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed to be along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the surface on the side facing the transmission protrusion 446 of the right end portion may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while contacting the curved surface, so the coil spring SP1. It is possible to shift to the launch state while maintaining the urging force of the maximum.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are configured to have an upwardly curved shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a slope with the center pointed down and down in the left-right direction, or a dormitory shape. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharpness of the central portion in the left-right direction as compared with the curved shape. Therefore, the deviation of the left and right arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

  Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310 and is separated by collision.

  In addition, when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the cover member 480 according to it. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is preferably configured with a curved shape with the left and right central portions protruding upward. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to be flat when viewed from the side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent in a side view. In this case, the dense positions of the granular members 320 can be brought closer to the upper half side.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in the front view is configured to be approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size or larger than the size of the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display within the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Anyway. Thereby, since the occurrence of a situation where the edge portion of the partition member 310 is visually recognized by being superimposed on the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be avoided, the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. it can.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, although the single collision member 420 was employ | adopted as a member which gives load with respect to the granular member 320, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and may be cooperatively operated or individually operated by separate driving devices.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 abuts on the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not abut on the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a column portion protruding from the plate portion 422 to the back side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and be configured to contact the front transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is unevenly formed in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the arrangement of the pillar portion is accompanied with the rotation of the front transmission member 440. Can be changed. Using this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (minute displacement).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited at all, and is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may approach by the slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the extended board part 485 arrange | positioned at the right and left of the cover member 480 was formed in the shape dented toward the back side, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the granular member 320 is separated from the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a protrusion that protrudes from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side may be formed, and the protrusion may be configured to be able to contact the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 accumulates locally, the granular member 320 can be destroyed by pushing the granular member 320 by the protruding portion in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 toward the entry side. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

  The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be scattered. In this case, regardless of the position at which the granular member 320 is deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular member 320 to be deposited, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be destroyed.

  Alternatively, the protrusions 482 may be configured as a pair of protrusions that start from the left and right central portion of the approaching front end portion and are inclined to both the left and right sides toward the retreating front end portion of the advance / retreat portion 481. . In this case, with the displacement of the entry side of the lid member 480, a load in a direction of pushing the granular member 320 toward the left and right outer sides can be applied to the granular member 320.

  Further, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the slope may be reversed, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or may be a combination of protrusions having different inclination degrees, There may be a ridge without a ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel (or overlapping) with the rotation axis). The number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set.

  In addition, the protrusion length of a protrusion part is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may protrude until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the advance / retreat portion 481 is constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481, so that the same effect as the effect described above can be achieved by the effect of the shape of the lid member 480. It can be played by the part.

  The operation timing of the protrusion when the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480 is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is located below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions in the vicinity of the state where the front transmission member 440 has rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down little by little, and the granular member 320 riding on the collision member 420 is obtained. Can be displaced vertically.

  Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, the granular member 320 is flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and can collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular member 320 can be executed, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be disrupted.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 jumps up (displaces upward) the granular member 320, the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protruding portion. be able to.

  Note that the forward / reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward / reverse direction, or the forward rotation may be generated with a short time interval. In this case, the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410 by the urging force of the coil spring SP1, so that the reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 can be caused.

  In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the advance / retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right, so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the space | interval of 480 and the curved board part 312 changes was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the lid member 480 is configured to have an uneven shape (wave shape) instead of a flat surface, and the lid member is close to the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312. You may comprise so that the space | interval of 480 and the curved board part 312 may change. Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance side edge part of the advance / retreat part 481 of the cover member 480 may be formed in parallel with the axis line of the rotating shaft O1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. This is not a limitation. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be ensured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

  In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, contact member 430, transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so as not to displace all the members at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the employed drive motor MT1 may be slightly enlarged.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted by the front transmission member 440 coming into contact with the linear motion member 410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, A load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the protrusion 414 is disposed in the circumferential half of the transmission protrusion 446 that faces the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410. On the other hand, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force is provided between the opposite half of the circumference and the protruding portion 414, so that the repulsive force causes the linear motion member 410 to move to the lower end position. Therefore, the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted at two positions, that is, the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one circumferential surface of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and drive force transmission may be performed through the groove to increase the number of transmission targets of the drive force.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which it is unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 due to detection by the detection sensor SC4. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. You may determine whether it is possible. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the launch state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction, so reverse rotation is possible if the launch state has not been reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the launch state has been exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear slide).

  In the first embodiment, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 is changed up and down so as to prevent inconvenience related to the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. Although the case where it was comprised was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this.

  For example, by changing the shape of the extended claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is higher than that of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. Accordingly, the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are balanced with the fact that the start of displacement is accelerated by their own weight, and for the player, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are simultaneously provided in all directions. It can appear as if the displacement has started.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle around the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730 by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be provided, and the urging force may be applied to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. good.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a means for applying a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

  In the first embodiment, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives a load first and is radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the 2nd guided protrusion 744b arrange | positioned receives a load later was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b occurs simultaneously. You may comprise as follows.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one projecting portion may be configured to project obliquely with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state. It is not limited. For example, a projecting portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b can be pushed outward in the radial direction by the projecting portion, thereby moving the telescopic displacement member 740 to the discrete state side. The directed displacement can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the effect member and loosens the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 allowed in the upper and lower intermediate positions has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the tolerance of the attitude | position change of the production | presentation member 700 may become large, so that it goes to a displacement lower end position.

  Moreover, although the degree of the posture change is configured by increasing / decreasing the generation position of the acting force with respect to the effect member 700, it is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise by increase / decrease in the generation area of action force.

  That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, since the thickness (hole depth) of the arc-shaped hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 The contact area of can be changed.

  The degree of the posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the front surface of the main body member 601 disposed to face the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 so that the distance from the pressing member PC1 is changed. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the effect member 700 is easily allowed at the front surface of the main body member 601 and at the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Moreover, you may comprise so that an space | interval may become narrow gradually as the production member 700 approaches a descent | fall end.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is not changed, but the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a resistance increasing / decreasing device capable of increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing / decreasing frictional resistance, a device for increasing / decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where it can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it is easily configured by disposing a magnetic body in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, as the arrangement member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as the displacement in the expansion direction, and the vertical position of the production member 700 is fixed, and then the production member 700 is expanded in the expansion direction. Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may control so that the displacement of an expansion direction may arise in the middle of the displacement of the up-down direction of the production member 700. FIG. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved left and right by displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in a direction in which the effect member 700 is reduced (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward. The effect of changing from a long posture to a vertically long posture can be offset, and a change in the posture of the effect member 700 in the forward tilt direction can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center portion of the center frame 86, the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collective arrangement state, and the state changes to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. You may comprise so that it may change to a bigger state.

  In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second-layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. In addition, the second layer glass unit is inclined from the front and rear positions similar to the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17. Is preferable.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 is easily inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second long member 743 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second long member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is changed by the biasing force. You may comprise so that it may change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily achieved.

  Although the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 and the electric wiring DK1 from rubbing by winding the cable tube around a portion disposed on the upper side of the base end side through hole 635a.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

  Further, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the throttle portion 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. The fastening position may be provided closer to the longitudinal slide member 820 than the connection position.

  Further, the means for fastening the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be used. That is, the width of a part of the placement portion 635 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed may be narrowed so that the displacement is limited by sandwiching the electrical wiring DK1, or the inside of the placement portion 635 Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

  In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily secured may be the lower arm member 630 including the placement portion 635 or the effect member 700 disposed on the distal end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. The main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) in which the wiring arm member 870 approaches and moves away from the upper, lower, left, and right planes in association with the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 on the upper, lower, left, and right planes. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the lateral slide member 840 is on the front / rear / left / right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up / down direction. The direction may be inclined and displaced.

  In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, and the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced spirally in the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b in the displacement rotating unit 800 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electric wiring is passed through these arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changeable by changing the posture of the arm member.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be disposed apart from each other.

  In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the wing-shaped member 854 is rotationally displaced, the wiring arm member 870 is further separated from the vertical slide member 820 to displace the wiring arm member 870 when necessary even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as described above.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the expansion member 600 of the expansion / reduction unit 600 to the extended state or the expansion state occurs in the production standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described. Absent. For example, when the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 is disposed in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in a discrete state, the effect member 700 May be configured to be changeable to an enlarged state.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and to avoid a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured from the same shape as that of the guide route DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that is bent with a longer left-right width than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without being bent. .

  In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for flowing down the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path of a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path of a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or may be shared. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

  In addition, since the arrangement of the winning ports 63, 64, 640, 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

  Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, it may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the gaming area, or may be arranged on the front side of the gaming area (such as inside the glass unit 16). Even in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along a path in a front view of a sphere that flows down the game area.

  Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to approach the left and right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in front view may be used.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the electrical decoration board | substrate of the horizontal board | substrate unit 166 was arrange | positioned with the attitude | position in which a thickness direction corresponds with an up-down direction, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, like the hemispherical illumination device 613, the electric decoration board may be arranged to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Further, the entire range of the electric decoration board is not limited to the one hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED may be directly visible.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a step shape, a section in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it is stopped may be alternately generated.

  Further, by holding the guide holes 733 formed in a staircase shape in a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or come into contact with different displacement trajectories and different displacement timings.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right of the launch effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illumination boards. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the horizontal substrate unit 166 and the vertical substrate unit 167 of the light guide plate effect unit 160 may be configured by a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. Further, the portion corresponding to the laterally long groove portion 171a (the left and right long portion) of the decoration means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the laterally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersecting position of a plurality of electrical decoration boards, You may comprise so that light can be visually recognized through the laterally long groove part 171a by arrange | positioning light emission means, such as LED.

  Moreover, from the viewpoint of increasing the light irradiation direction, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard electrical decoration boards are used. For example, light emitting means such as LEDs may be arranged on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing the flexible substrate. Thereby, the optical axis of light emission means, such as LED arrange | positioned on the surface of a flexible substrate, can be pointed in various directions, and the irradiation direction of light can be increased. In this case, it can be constituted by a single substrate.

  In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of components is reduced) regardless of whether the configuration is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

  For example, in each of the embodiments described above, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations of the key device A130 has been described. However, the number (number of formations) of the protrusions A133b may be reduced to 1. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is disposed in the main control device A110 has been described. However, the number (arrangement number) of the key devices A130 may be increased to 2 or more. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each component with respect to another component, the arrangement direction (orientation, posture, phase) with respect to the other component of each component, or the arrangement based on the other component of each component The order may be changed. The order of arrangement may be changed for all the configurations, or only a part of the configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is one side (the first connection wall A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged at the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the opening A260 (second region) of the operation wall A210 (second region) may be arranged. You may arrange | position in the longitudinal direction other side (3rd connection wall part A240 side).

  Further, for example, in each of the embodiments described above, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). , R direction) has been described with respect to the arrangement direction (posture, phase) orthogonal to the direction, the direction connecting the pair of projections A133b (projection A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) are predetermined. The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (an angle greater than 0 ° and smaller than 90 °).

  Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side close to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order in which the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide walls A251), and the openings A260 (covering parts A270) are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is reversed. The order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering part A270) is illustrated. )

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided to protrude from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used as the operation wall portion A210), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be formed in the part. That is, it is not necessary to be formed in a part lowered in the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As other parts, for example, parts forming the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. Examples include A204 or the right wall portion A205, the back wall portion A301, the upper wall portion A302, the lower wall portion A303, the left wall portion A304, or the right wall portion A305 of the box base A300. Similarly, as other parts, for example, the first connection wall part A220, the second connection wall part A230, or the third connection wall part A240 is exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided to protrude from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used as the operation wall portion A210), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210.

  In this case, switch device A120 should just extend the length dimension of operation part A122 to the position projected from the front (surface by the arrow F direction) of operation wall part A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 with the extension of the length of the operation portion A122.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a concave portion is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the concave bottom surface of the concave portion is the operation wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). The operation wall portion A210 is positioned at a lower position (main control device A110 side), but is not necessarily limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200. It is good also considering the site | part which forms a protrusion and forms the projecting front end surface of the protrusion as the operation wall part A210 (that is, it is operated to a position one step higher than the front wall part A201 (the side opposite to the main controller A110). The wall portion A210 is positioned).

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 As long as the operation element is operated through the opening, the stored item is arbitrary. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. As such a stored item, for example, it has a connecting part connected to an opening / closing lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging a sphere from the flow path of the sphere, and the opening / closing cover is operated by operating the connecting part as an operator. Examples of the member (structure, device) for opening and closing the door are illustrated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a push button switch or a key operation type selector switch is employed as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described. The operation means may be employed. Examples of other types of operation means include a tactile switch, a rocker switch, a dip switch, a thumb rotary switch, and a toggle switch.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the operation elements (operation unit A122, key A140) is pushing and rotation has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cover is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation buttons are displaced like a seesaw by pressing both ends alternately like a rocker switch operation button), tilting (for example, toggle) A mode in which the operating lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, such as an operating lever of a switch, is exemplified.

  In this case, the sliding direction of the operating element, the direction connecting both ends of the operating element that displaces the seesaw, and the falling direction of the tilting operating element are in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable to arrange the operation means in a parallel posture. This is because the operability of the operation means can be improved by effectively utilizing the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  In any of the above-described operation modes, the shape of the front view of the openings A250 and A260 is formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the operation element (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and the end surface held by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in the state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or end surface gripped by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (rings) The configuration may be such that the portion A272a or the outer edge of the square portion A272b) abuts. That is, at least one of the surface or the end surface gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position or the on position is brought into contact with the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated. When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

  It should be noted that the gap between the surface and end surface of the key A140 gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130, and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The clearance between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (the angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be allowed). That is, before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is not easily removed or damaged, or the solder is not peeled off, at least one of the gaps is eliminated (the key A140 or the key device A130 comes into contact). . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and still more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited thereto. , A133b may be formed only at one place or at three or more places. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential direction positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction as in the above embodiments, or may be formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are intermittently formed in the circumferential direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited thereto. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 protrude outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is disposed in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is projected radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and radially inward on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration is possible in which a concave portion that is recessed is provided, and the protruding portion of the covering portion A270 is disposed in the internal space of the concave portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the concave portion is continued to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be covered with the key device A130 (the protruding portion is inserted into the concave portion) (the protruding portion). An opening for inserting the portion into the recess may be formed on the end face).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition to this, the protrusion on the guide wall A251. May be connected.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of the formed ridges is as follows. There may be one or three or more. In the case of forming a plurality of lines, the connecting position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions where the phases of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

  In addition, the 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212, the cross-sectional shape of other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front (surface by the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210) ) And width dimensions (dimensions in the direction perpendicular to the height direction where the cross-section disappears) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end surface shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either may be a large value.

  In each said embodiment, the height dimension (standing dimension from the front (surface by the side of arrow F) of operation wall part A210) of 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212 follows the extension direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extending direction.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a height dimension may become low gradually as it leaves | separates from the end connected to coating | coated part A270. In this case, it is possible to efficiently increase the rigidity of the covering portion A270 while reducing the material cost.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle of the key A140 (phase difference between the on position and the off position) is set to 90 ° has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) (Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

  In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A272) corresponds to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (region necessary for allowing displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (one side and the opposite side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of about 180 degrees. It is formed in a different shape.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the key A140 has a rotation radius (a distance from the rotation center to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger)) on one side of the rotation center, and the rotation center. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotation radius (from the rotation center to the end surface (gripping with the finger) is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front-view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described. good. Examples of the other front view shape include a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially oval shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape having five or more pentagons, and a shape obtained by combining these shapes.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a configuration in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is along the directions of arrows U and D).

  In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is a connection wall (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall. A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but is not necessarily limited thereto. The entire outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall portion.

  That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box cover A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall portion A210 may be disposed (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200, A3200.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged in a substantially series (substantially in a row) is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other arrangements are also possible. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement dispersed in positions having no regularity, and a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Moreover, when arrange | positioning in substantially series (substantially 1 row), the series direction may be arrangement | positioning non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of operation wall part A210 (box cover A200, A3200), and arrangement | positioning orthogonally crossed. It may be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) of the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are formed. One or a plurality of protrusions or protrusions (ribs) may be erected from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side).

  In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a part formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is an end wall in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). A form extending in a radial straight line from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) outward in the radial direction is preferable. Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Thus, when the key A140 is extracted, the key A140 engages with the edge of the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272, and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the extraction direction (arrow F direction) of the key A140. This is because damage to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the protrusions (ribs).

  Alternatively, the protrusion (rib) may be formed in an annular shape in front view that is continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of the protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, with a predetermined interval in the radial direction). It may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, from the printed board A119). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

  Further, the retraction amounts of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the retraction amounts of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retraction amount may change.

  In this case, it is preferable that the receding amount of the standing end surface from the reference surface is smaller as the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The printed circuit board A119 is farther from the abutting standing wall when the standing wall is brought into contact with the area farther from the fastening hole A206a, because the restriction by the screw ASC is weaker than the closer area. It is easy to be deformed (displaced) in the direction to be done, and the degree of adhesion with the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 is weakened. By reducing the receding amount from the reference surface of the standing tip surface, the standing wall farther from the fastening hole A206a This is because it is easy to ensure the close contact between the standing end surface of the standing wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 on all the standing walls.

  For example, in this embodiment, assuming that the standing front end surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is a reference plane, the fastening hole A206a (in the order of the standing wall A280, the standing wall A290, and the standing wall A208) Since the distance from the standing wall A209) is increased, the retreat amount from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order in accordance with the separation distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the standing tip surface of the standing wall A208). It is preferable that the amount of retreat from the reference plane is minimized).

  Further, each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane becomes smaller as the distance from the fastening hole A206a becomes longer. That is, it is good also as a structure by which the standing front end surface in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290 is respectively inclined with respect to the front wall part A201 of box cover A200, A3200.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the set value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and instead it is replaced. Alternatively, in addition to this, the image may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the like.

  Moreover, the structure by which a setting value is not displayed on either the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and a 7 segment display may be sufficient.

  In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the setting value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the setting value before the activation, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to suppress the unauthorized acquisition of the set value by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

  Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (the rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided. When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 has a predetermined angle or more. When the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . It is because it can suppress that a setting change is made illegally.

  Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position with the rotation axis A410 as the rotation center) is provided, and the substrate box A100 is provided with respect to the inner frame 12. , A2100, A3100, A4100 is detected by the second detection sensor to be opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). When the input from A130 is invalidated and the opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. You may comprise so that it may be accept | permitted. It is because it can suppress that a setting change is made illegally.

  Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the first detection sensor detects the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are predetermined. When the second detection sensor does not detect an opening (rotation) that is greater than an angle, the above-described setting change may be allowed. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch that displaces the mechanical detection unit in accordance with opening and closing.

  In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. The operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is allowed (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). The predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or released). In this case, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

  In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. In the above description, the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is allowed (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). If the predetermined electrical connection line is not released from the main controller A110, the connection state of the other electrical connection lines is not concerned (that is, even if it is connected, it is released). However, even if connection and release are mixed), the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device). When connected to the A110 may be configured to set change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and paying out game balls.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the protrusion A2273 extends in a streak shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of protrusions are juxtaposed with a predetermined interval between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be formed intermittently between the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.

  The range in which the protrusion A2273 or the plurality of protrusions is formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the position AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center, so that the second position (the position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. Although the case where it arrange | positions to b) reference) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, Of course, it is possible to employ | adopt another displacement form.

  As another displacement form, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L, R direction) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slid to the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the hinge 18. As a result, the substrate box is arranged in the second position, and the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). Examples include a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) with A410 as the rotation center.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and at least one or both of the rotation axes A4410 are You may form in box cover A200, A3200 or box base A300. In this case, the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300 are each formed with a divided body of the rotation axis A4410, and the box covers A200, A3200 are connected to the box base A300, and each of the divided bodies has one rotating shaft. A4410 may be formed.

  The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotation axis A410 is formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, one rotation axis A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 connected to the box base A300.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising: an action means; and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured to have a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is disposed displaceably on the front side of a liquid crystal display region and includes a displacement means that is displaced in accordance with driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-153095). See). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention gradually decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the function of the assistance means in which the assistance means has a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. This can prevent the player from getting bored and keep the player's attention high.

  In addition, the specific example of an auxiliary | assistant means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that constitutes a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or a push that changes the displacement mode of the displacement means by displacing the displacement means by a driving device different from the action means. Means may be used. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured in a first state in which the first action part can act on the displacement means and in a second state in which the second action part can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, since the portion when the action means acts on the displacement means can be made different, even if the movement of the action means is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be varied.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means includes a contact means that abuts against the displacement means to give a load, and is configured to be able to generate a load in a plurality of types through the contact means. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since there are a plurality of types of loads generated through the contact means, the displacement modes of the displacement means can be set to a plurality of types.

  In the gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable, a first contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and configured to be able to contact the displacement means, the first contact. A second contact portion different from the portion, and an angle in a predetermined direction view between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangent line of the first contact portion) is The gaming machine A4 is configured to be different from an angle in the predetermined direction view between a displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or a tangent line of the second contact portion).

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacing means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the abutting means. Can be generated in the direction of

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and parallel to each other so that the tangent lines are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with less energy loss. Can be made. Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating unit configured to generate a load for displacing the action unit is provided, and the load generating unit is loaded at a position where the disposing unit is arranged more densely. A gaming machine A6 that is configured to generate

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support mode that allows a posture change, and the posture change occurs on a side where it is easy to maintain a balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by the posture change of the action means, so that there is an overload locally on the action means. It can be avoided.

  In addition, the cause which the attitude | position change of an action means produces is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balance of loads from the displacement means, or a drive device that changes the posture of the action means may be provided. When the posture change of the action means is caused by the balance of the load from the displacement means, it is easy to change the posture of the action means by providing a plurality of lengths from the portion facing the displacement means to the support position of the action means. A plurality of types can be generated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide the displacement in one direction of the displacement means. A first guide portion and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement in the other direction of the displacement means, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the formation modes of are different.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied in accordance with the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, and is configured so that the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means varies depending on the arrangement, and at a position where it is easy to maintain the balance of the displacement means. A gaming machine A9 configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacing means includes one or more members, and they are configured not to be coupled to each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and solidified. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

  In the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means can be stabilized.

  In addition, the formation method of a gravity center is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making a hole in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing / retreating means that moves forward / backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
An arrangement unit configured to be displaceable in a predetermined range; and an advancement / retraction unit configured to be displaceable in an advance / retreat direction with respect to the range; The gaming machine B1 is configured so that the width of the game machine can be changed, and the change modes of the width are plural types.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine comprising a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members in accordance with the displacement of the first movable member. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means has a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacement means of the arranging means can be configured by a plurality of types. The displacement mode can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of an arrangement | positioning means is not limited at all. For example, a granular effect member formed from a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball may be used.

  In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of changes in the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance / retreat means is not limited. For example, the entry side portion of the advance / retreat means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the range width may be changed by providing a portion having a different width to enter the range, or the range of the advance / retreat means may be changed by changing the displacement width. The width may be variable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means configured to prevent the placement means from entering and exiting, and is configured to be changeable, and the advance / retreat means enters the non-change state of the range. The gaming machine B2 is configured to be displaceable in an aspect, and the box-like means includes an opening portion that can be inserted through the advance / retreat means and cannot be inserted through the arrangement means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the advancement / retraction means can be entered into the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling off from the range.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning of an open part is not limited at all. For example, you may arrange | position in the location which an arrangement | positioning means cannot reach easily. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the disposition means will accidentally fall out of the range. Moreover, you may arrange | position an open part in the location (for example, the upper side as the reverse side of a gravitational direction) where the load from an arrangement | positioning means does not produce easily. In this case, it is possible to avoid the load from the disposing means being applied to the advancing / retreating means that is being displaced, and the displacement of the advancing / retreating means being obstructed or the occurrence of a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the disposing means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating unit is configured such that the direction in which the arranging unit is guided differs according to the direction in contact with the arranging unit.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to show the player that the placement means is guided in different directions by the same advance / retreat means. Thereby, since the kind of effect can be increased, the effect effect of the effect using the arrangement | positioning means and the advance / retreat means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance / retreat means is configured such that a gap between the advancing surface and the facing surface of the range is shorter than a width of the arrangement means in the state of entering the range. A gaming machine B4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancement / retraction means can be used as the arrangement means even when the arrangement means is arranged on the side far from the advance / retreat means. Can act.

  In addition, you may comprise so that there may be no clearance gap between an advancing / retreating means and the opposing surface of a range. Further, it may be configured such that a part has a gap and the other part has no gap.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advance / retreat means is configured to enter the range by a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and a representative tip portion farthest from the shaft is the tip at the approach side. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the gap between the ranges is the shortest.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion that is likely to have the largest positional deviation from the axis first enters the range, so that It is possible to cope with the misalignment at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce the resistance of the subsequent approach operation.

  In the gaming machine B5, the representative distal end portion is provided with a predetermined overhang portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the side away from the range as the distance from the overhang portion in the axial direction increases. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the placement means can be displaced so as to be away from the predetermined overhanging portion in the process of advancement / retraction means.

  In the gaming machine B6, the advance / retreat means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advance / retreat means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion, so that the disposing means pushed away by the overhanging portion Can be secured.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape by which the range side is open | released. For example, the shape in which the range side is opened before the advance / retreat means enters, or the shape in which the range side is opened in a state where the advance / retreat means has entered may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the game apparatus includes a driving unit capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the advancing / retreating unit. Is configured so that the driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advance / retreat means can be changed, and the contact area is the entry of the advance / retreat means into the range. A gaming machine B8 that is configured to maximize initially and then decrease.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the beginning of entry when the advancing / retreating means starts to come into contact with the arranging means and a large load is likely to occur. As a result, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the advance / retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of an advance / retreat means is not limited at all. For example, a means for displacing outside the game area or a means for displacing within the game area may be used.

<Synchronized operation of two members with transmission cam>
A drive unit; a displacement unit configured to be displaceable and configured by one or a plurality of members; and a transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive unit to the displacement unit. A first transmission unit configured to transmit a driving force of the driving unit to a first target unit of the displacement unit in a first mode; and a second mode different from the first mode of the displacement unit. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the second target unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the driving device is used for displacement of the displacement means, and includes a first drive device for moving the displacement means up and down and a second drive device for rotating the displacement means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2006-202210). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace the plurality of displacing means in order to execute the operation effect of the displacing means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit are disposed in the transmission unit so that the driving force is transmitted to the first target unit or the second target unit of the displacement unit, respectively. Since it is comprised, the transmission of the driving force to the 1st object part and the 2nd object part can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of a displacement means can be stabilized.

  In addition, the time when a driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the driving force is transmitted to the first target unit and the second target unit at the same time may be used, the time when the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted simultaneously) may be used.

  Moreover, when transmitting a driving force simultaneously to a 1st object part and a 2nd object part, it is preferable to arrange | position so that the generation direction of at least one part of a driving force may follow a gravity direction. Thereby, the dead weight can be used for driving force transmission.

  In the gaming machine C1, the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur separately at different times.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by reducing the maximum value of the driving resistance.

  Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission generated by a displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member The displacement trajectory is configured to partially intersect, and the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacted state, the first member is interposed through the first member. A gaming machine C3 configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force to the second member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmitting means and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted via the first member can be configured.

  In the gaming machine C3, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not contact the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, it can be avoided that the first member being displaced comes into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member has arrived at the predetermined position and stopped, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member is smoothly switched. Can be made easier.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the driving force transmission mode can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. And unintentional collision or contact of each member can be avoided.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging unit configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and driving force transmission to the second member is performed in a direction opposite to the urging force. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is in a predetermined arrangement in a state where the second member is arranged on the opposite side to the first direction in the predetermined direction. Can do. Thereby, the timing which displaces a 2nd member against an urging | biasing force with the displacement of a transmission means, and the timing which fastens a 2nd member against an urging | biasing force can be formed.

  In the gaming machine C6, the first member is configured to be displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced toward the predetermined direction. .

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used supplementarily.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission portion can be formed in a non-contact state that does not contact the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission part does not interfere with the game.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member as the displacement state of the second member and the displacement state separated from the second transmission portion And can be configured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member and the transmission unit arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission unit to be in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9, characterized by passing through a regulating section to regulate.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is blocked by the restriction unit, thereby reaching the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

  In addition, the aspect of a control part is not limited at all. For example, a guide part that restricts the displacement mode to a slide displacement by restricting the displacement may be used, or a shaft support part that restricts the rotational displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a load from the first state where the first target portion is displaced or stopped by the driving force of the drive means, and the second target portion. The gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change state between a second state where the state is displaced or stopped.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting the generation of load when it is away>
A gaming machine comprising a driving means, a displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacing means. A first means configured to be able to change a state between a state and a non-contact state that is not in contact with the displacement means, and a target for transmitting a load applied from the outside to the first means can be switched. A gaming machine D1 characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a displacement means composed of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the drive means can abut against another movable body at the displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-028623). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving unit via the displacement unit, and the state of the driving unit by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor), Since there may be a difference in the actual state of the driving means, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

  Further, there is a possibility that the operating resistance of the driving means is unstablely increased or decreased due to the load applied to the driving means, and the deterioration of the driving means is accelerated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving unit can be stabilized. In addition, the durability of the driving means can be improved by suppressing an unstable increase or decrease in the operating resistance of the driving means.

  Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited in any way. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed in the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receives an external force) You may comprise so that it may generate | occur | produce only in a non-contact state.

  In the gaming machine D1, a gaming machine D2 characterized in that the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, it is possible to reduce the load received by the displacing means as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an arrangement means that is arranged so as to be able to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured so that the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the load transmission is transmitted between the transmission means and the displacement means. Can be blocked.

  The collision of the arrangement means may occur in the contact state of the first means or may occur in the non-contact state. When the collision of the arrangement means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted, so the arrangement of the transmission means (the presence or absence of contact between the transmission means and the displacement means) ), The load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in a direction of a load generated by the contact ( The gaming machine D4 is configured to be flexible enough to be deformed).

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means is suppressed by absorbing the load by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be contactable, and the second means of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The abutting portion is formed of a material capable of absorbing shock, and the gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 includes an urging means for urging the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of the urging direction displacement range of the urging means. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacement means (position waiting for load generation from the transmission means). It is easy to place the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position in the control for operating the transmission means at a high speed to a position where the one means and the displacement means are separated from each other. Thereby, control of a drive means can be performed easily and appropriately.

  Further, by lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid inadvertent contact between the first means and the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change its posture accompanying the collision of the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arrangement means can be used for the attitude change of the first means, so the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means has the urging force of the urging means. The biasing state to be received, the transmission means abuts on the displacement means, displaces the displacement means to the opposite side of the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first biasing force of the biasing means is the first The gaming machine D8 is configured to be changeable between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the device is disabled and a non-contact state in which the first device and the displacement device are separated from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease of posture change with respect to the collision of the placement means).

<Regularly restricting one of the forward and reverse rotations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point whose displacement mode is changed. The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner described above.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable accessory to perform different operations with a plurality of effects (for example, see JP-A-2006-73517). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the different operations correspond to the presence / absence of switching of the driving direction of the driving device, so that the type of effect can be determined from the driving sound of the driving device, and the effect to be executed from now on. Since the player can predict the above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the effect to be executed from now on by the determination participating means. Thereby, improvement of a player's interest can be aimed at.

  In addition, the displacement aspect of a displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it is good also as a different production | presentation with the displacement of a displacement means by a certain effect production | presentation and a removal production | presentation. In this case, if there is a single displacement mode of the displacement means to the predetermined position, it can be determined whether or not it is correct by causing displacement from the predetermined position (for example, driving sound is generated). On the other hand, by using a plurality of displacement modes, even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound is generated), it is difficult to determine whether or not this is true.

  Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern may be used.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for displacing the displacing unit, and a regulating unit that regulates the displacement of the displacing unit. The regulating unit includes the driving unit that generates the driving force. A gaming machine E2 that is configured to be capable of restricting displacement of the displacement means in the absence of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be turned off when the displacement means is restricted. It can be difficult to determine whether the direction is the reverse direction.

  Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate a driving force when a long-time effect (long reach or the like) is executed in a state where the displacement of the displacement means is restricted, it is possible to suppress the driving means from generating heat.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of the driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is provided separately.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine is provided with a discrimination participation means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate which mode is displaced among the plurality of types of modes. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it can be configured so that it is difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section by the determination participating means. As compared with the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case, it is possible to make it easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means until it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is configured to be able to maintain the arrangement of the displacement means in the section.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the drive sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such that driving of the driving unit is started before notification of the success / failure.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detection means determines an executable displacement switch among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 that is also used as a determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the position detecting sensor for the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode can be used together. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<Integrity of multiple members>
A gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are configured to be displaceable, and the manner in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 that is configured as follows.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member configured to be displaceable to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, JP-A-2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line. Therefore, depending on the approaching speed, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member will return after contact. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the production mode regardless of the displacement speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the proximity of the first member and the second member is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not close to each other on the same straight line, but is changed to approach each other after approaching on a separate straight line, so that the first member and the second member move closer to each other. Reversal can be avoided and the production mode can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is at least divided into a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for contacting each other, and the first member and The gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is provided with a load generating means capable of generating a load that is directed to the side where the first member and the second member are kept in close proximity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

  The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load having a certain magnitude. For example, when a load (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) that is likely to be received changes depending on the situation (for example, a gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generation unit may be changed accordingly.

  Further, the load generated by the load generating means need not always be generated. For example, the generation of a load and the cancellation of the load may be switched in accordance with the change in the situation described above. The load generating means may be external.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F3 includes displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means includes the displacement A gaming machine F4 that is configured integrally with the generating means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be properly maintained, and the timing shifted It is possible to prevent a load from occurring.

  Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can be complemented with each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

  In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member is in contact with the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute the effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than the predetermined state.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations with respect to the first member or the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates loads at a plurality of locations with respect to the first member or the second member. Further, it is possible to maintain the state against the posture change of the first member or the second member. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 1st member and the 2nd member are constituted in three dimensions, it can avoid that a shift of arrangement is conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating unit, and the plurality of loaded portions include a first loaded portion and a first loaded portion thereof. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement relative to the load generating means than the loaded portion, and the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied stepwise to the first member or the second member. Moreover, the role of the load given to a 1st to-be-loaded part and a 2nd to-be-loaded part can be divided. For example, the first loaded part can be used for the role of arrangement at a predetermined position, and the second loaded part can be used for the role of posture adjustment.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating means is configured such that the portion that applies a load directed to the side facing the gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member as compared to the other portions. Alternatively, the game machine F9 is characterized in that the length of the facing surface facing the second member is long.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, with respect to the other portions, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, or the facing surface can be easily hidden.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. .

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily prevent the first member or the second member from being cracked or chipped due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member as compared with the case where the assembly work is performed in the contact state, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without any defects. it can.

  As a result, the designed contact surfaces can be provided on the first member and the second member, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of misalignment due to the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling state of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be able to be displaced by arrangement change and rotation (see, for example, JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the portion that supports the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed with a large diameter, the position of the displacement means is necessary because a gap is required to ensure the displacement. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of not enough measures against the change and suppressing the posture change of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the posture change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. Thereby, even if the space where the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is small, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

  The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting with a straight line along the horizontal direction (such as the horizontal direction) as an axis may be used, or horizontal swing with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction (such as the vertical direction) may be used.

  In the gaming machine G0, the operating means is configured to be able to increase or decrease an operating force that suppresses a change in the attitude of the displacing means in accordance with an arrangement position of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. Thereby, the arrangement space of a displacement means can be narrowed, maintaining the freedom degree of the production | presentation of a displacement means high.

  For example, when the displacement means is reciprocally displaced, the position of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

  Also, for example, when the displacement means itself is enlarged / reduced or rotationally displaced by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the position of the displacement means tends to collapse. By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the operating means is configured to support the displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. Can be made easier.

  In the gaming machine G2, the operating means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from a horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line. The posture change can be suppressed in all directions.

  In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means relative to the action means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a support force generation position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

  In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that the area when viewed in a predetermined direction is increased or decreased, and the action means is configured such that an action force generation position is maximized at a displacement end position of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the area increase effect of the displacement means is most effective. Thus, it is possible to effectively suppress the posture change of the displacement means.

  Furthermore, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smooth. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the acting force generation position is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases frequently. The problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

  On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacing means from becoming excessive and to prevent the drive device from becoming large by reducing the acting force generation position at positions other than the displacement end position.

<Wiring guide for propeller unit>
Displacement means, electrical wiring connected to the displacement means, and electrical wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring displacement means, wherein the displacement means is the predetermined portion The gaming machine H1 is configured so that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when displacing to the side approaching.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member interlocked with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, JP 2012-157474 A). See the publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electrical wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. There is a problem that the space for disposing the electric wiring on the outside is necessary, so that the degree of freedom in disposing the displacement means is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the electric wiring displacing means is configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means, so that the contact between the displacing means and the electric wiring is positive. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to displace beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement means.

  In addition, when a displacement means approaches a predetermined part, it is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there may be a risk that the displacement means and the predetermined portion come into contact with each other, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than a reference length.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid the amount of displacement of the displacing means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction being limited to the electrical wiring.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set to a direction along the predetermined direction view. The effect on the appearance can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game machine includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electric wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electric wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4, wherein the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means.

  In addition, the structure which becomes easy to displace the 2nd predetermined part with respect to a retention means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is disposed in a spiral shape in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

  In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is disposed outside the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outward from the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means, so that the stopping means projects to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. Thereby, since the accommodation amount of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, the displacement amount of the displacing means that compensates for the distance from the stopping means with the second predetermined portion can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is configured integrally with the displacement means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement of the electrical wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence changing means.

<Flow path of the ball through the electric Chu>
A game area and a flow-down means for flowing down the game ball discharged from the game area, the flow-down means including a section configured to allow the game ball discharged from the game area to be visually recognized. Game machine I0 to do.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is formed of a plywood board (see, for example, JP-A-2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot visually recognize the game ball. Therefore, it is easy for a player to lose sight of the game ball, and if he / she does not pay attention to the discharge timing, he / she may receive an impression as if the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

  Even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, there are many cases where the winning opening and the out opening are arranged close to each other. There is a possibility that it will be mistaken for the one entered. In this case, there is a possibility of feeling distrust with no payout of prize balls. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the discharge of game balls from the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is configured with a section in which the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, so that the player visually observes the game ball flowing down the section. Thus, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, the discharge of the game ball from the game area can be improved.

  It should be noted that the discharge of game balls from the game area means the whole manner in which game balls are discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through a prize ball opening or may be discharged through an out opening without a prize ball.

  In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down the game area is disposed so as to be able to pass through, and is provided with a profit granting unit configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the game ball passing, The means includes a first component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side closer to the profit granting unit above the profit granting unit, and disposed downstream of the first component. A gaming machine I1 comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit granting unit above the granting unit.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I0, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flow down means, The game ball can be prevented from approaching the lower-side profit granting means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the game balls that have already been discharged from the game area and the game balls that are still flowing down the game area in the vicinity of the profit granting means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to do it.

  The predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, a prize ball may be paid out, a symbol such as the first symbol or the second symbol may be selected, or other benefits may be used.

  The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the gaming area, and frame means disposed in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 configured to cause a game ball to flow down to the inner side of the means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the game ball discharged from the gaming area can be caused to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means by the flow-down means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to grasp that the game ball is discharged from the game area.

  The attention means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which a pattern is variably displayed, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

  In the gaming machine I2, the flow down means includes a speed reducing means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Invention around the panel design and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means, and a placement means arranged on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction view, and the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction view, The gaming machine J0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is disposed so as to be smaller than a visible area.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an electric circuit board having a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the back side of a base board having a gaming area on the front surface, and the board surface of the electric circuit board and the board surface of the base board There is a gaming machine in which are arranged almost in parallel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the area of the electric decoration board that is visually recognized in the front view is large, when the LED light is irradiated to the decorative member arranged on the front side of the electric decoration board, the electric field is not displayed in the field of view. There is a possibility that the decorative board enters and the decorative member and the electric decoration board are visually recognized as overlapping in front and back.

  On the surface of the electric decoration board, only a configuration necessary for functions such as a circuit and a resistor is arranged, and usually the design is not high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the electrical decoration board are visually recognized in front and back, the appearance is poor and the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction view is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. A region where only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate can be formed. Thereby, the presentation effect of a predetermined board | substrate can be improved.

  The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, an area that can be visually recognized may be reduced by being partially hidden, or an area that may be visually recognized by being entirely shielded may be used.

  The optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis is directed at an angle therebetween. It can be used.

  In addition, the light transmittance of an arrangement | positioning means is not limited at all. For example, the light transmission may be configured well, the light transmission may be configured low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each part.

  In the gaming machine J0, the placed means includes a plurality of direction changing means that are arranged on both sides of the predetermined substrate and change a traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. Further, a low transmission means having a light transmittance lower than that of the direction changing means is disposed, and at least a part of the predetermined substrate is disposed inside the low transmission means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range where a predetermined board | substrate is visually recognized can be narrowed.

  In addition, as a direction change means, it is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows down, a case member or a decorative member fixedly arranged But it ’s okay.

  In the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape part constituting a predetermined pattern or figure shape.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means can be confused with a predetermined pattern or figure shape, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  The shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, a frame-shaped bone part such as a window frame may be used, or a bone part that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and a rotating outer peripheral part, or a series of semantic contents including arbitrary character strings and patterns. A part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo) may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is disposed with the end face of the plate facing the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined substrate in the predetermined direction can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine J3, the game machine J3 includes display means for executing a display effect visible in a predetermined direction, and a game area disposed in front of the display means, and the predetermined board includes the display area of the display means, A gaming machine J4, which is arranged at a boundary in a predetermined direction with a gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is arranged at the boundary, so that light is emitted from the back of the gaming area to the front side and the light effect is generally executed, and only the display area side from the predetermined substrate is executed. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the screen or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

  In the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board that constitutes the gaming area on the front side.

  According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, for example, the arrangement of the light emitting means is compared with the case where the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner side surface of the rear case on which the movable accessory is arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the back case along the back of the game board, the back case side can be visually recognized from the window portion of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back of the game board without looking at it with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

  Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the center of the back case, the arrangement space of the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but by the method of disposing the predetermined substrate on the back of the game board. If there is, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the predetermined substrate.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of the accessory at the time of shipment>
Displacement means and restriction means configured to be able to restrict displacement of the displacement means, the restriction means including a first state that can act on the displacement means, and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means The gaming machine K1 is configured to be capable of changing states, and is configured to suppress movement of the displacing means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory (displacement means) that moves downward from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (see, for example, JP-A-2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fixing and releasing the displacement means.

  That is, while the gaming machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, the movable accessory can be fixed up to a situation where a large vibration or external force can be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment or the like. It is not configured to function.

  Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the buffer is removed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, for example, to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and after the arrival at the game hall, the buffer material is removed. However, in the case where the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the restriction means, the arrangement and fixing of the displacement means can be improved.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is extracted, the restricting means is not extracted, so that it is difficult to continue the game if the state changes easily due to an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, when the limiting means is configured to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems during the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the limiting means is configured to be able to change states between the first state and the second state when no power is supplied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. Thereby, it can prevent that a worker's work becomes difficult in a power failure state or recovery work from a power failure state.

  The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a biasing unit that biases the operation unit of the limitation unit in a predetermined direction, and the limitation unit is configured to displace the operation unit from a reference position to a side opposite to the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The operation unit is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3, which is disposed at a separated position.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in the second state, since the operation unit is arranged at a separated position away from the reference position, it is given to the installed gaming machine such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the change in state of the restricting means due to the external force that can be generated, and it is possible to easily prevent the restricting means from changing from the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area constituting means that constitutes an area where the displacing means can be displaced.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operation unit is arranged outside the area constituting unit, so even if the displacement unit is displaced with the operation of the operation unit, It is possible to avoid the displacement means coming into contact with the operator.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a biasing unit that biases the operation unit of the limiting unit in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting unit has a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The restricting means includes guide means for guiding the displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction, and the guide means is configured to perform the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 that is configured to ensure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of the portion.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it can be easily prevented from being displaced in a predetermined direction, and the operation unit can be easily prevented from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to avoid a state change of the limiting means due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

  In the gaming machine K5, the operation unit includes an engagement unit configured to be engageable with the guide unit, the biasing unit is disposed at a center of the operation unit, and the engagement unit is configured to operate the operation unit. A gaming machine K6, which is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5, even when an external force with an unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operation section is displaced with the engaging section as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change without stopping the (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening / closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipment, or the like.

  In the gaming machine K6, the restricting means is disposed on the back side of the region constituting means configured to be rotatable by a support shaft on the left and right position side, and the engaging portion is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the store clerk in the gaming hall opens the front door Thus, the operation when operating the control means can be facilitated. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width is increased (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be made closer to the front side.

  In the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is disposed on a support shaft side of the region constituting means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is disposed on the support shaft side, so that an operator who works by opening the front door is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

  In addition, the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced as compared with the case where the restricting means is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. It is possible to prevent the change.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guiding accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacing means in a state where the guiding accuracy of the displacement of the limiting means alone is lowered is Can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, when energized in the first state, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a prevention notifying means for informing so as to prevent the energized state from being continued.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can be notified to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

  The notification mode is not limited in any way. For example, it may be notified by displaying an error display on a liquid crystal display device, may be notified by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or illuminates a predetermined illumination means (or keeps it off). This may be notified.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine including a container that accommodates an object includes operation means disposed on the object and configured to be operable, and the container has an opening formed at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by that.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent fraud from being applied to the control board.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

  According to the gaming machine L0, it is provided with an operating means that is disposed on an object and is configured to be operable, and the container is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering portions A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

  According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L0, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container.

  In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding a displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating means. A gaming machine M2 that is arranged to face a part.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is disposed to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the opposing part while suppressing the insertion of the operation element into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element is inhibited. Insertion can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape whose base end is fixed and one end is free.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and the one end free, thus simplifying the shape and improving the moldability. It can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine M3, a gaming machine M4, wherein a projecting portion projects from the facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, since the protrusion is provided at the opposing portion, the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

  In the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion protrudes from a surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the protrusion protrudes from the surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operating means, and therefore the opposing portion and the first of the operating means. It is possible to reduce the gap between the surface and the foreign object such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the gap.

  In the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means. It is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container by eliminating the gap between them.

  In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the inserting direction by the operating element, the opposing part in the inserting direction. Can be prevented from being deformed. Therefore, it can suppress that the base end side of an opposing part is damaged.

  In addition, since the opposing part is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, the elastic part of the opposing part is used to form and maintain the protruding part in contact ( That is, the degree of adhesion can be increased and the insertion of foreign matter such as wire can be suppressed).

  The gaming machine M7 according to any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, wherein the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the opposing portion has an edge abutting against the operation element inserted into the operation means. A gaming machine M8 characterized by being formed.

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operating element in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens and closes the member provided with the container). When the operating element collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the connecting portion with the object) increases. In addition, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operation element inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operation means (the connection portion with the object) is large. Become. In these cases, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object breaks).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. By tilting the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) to the edge of the facing portion, the operating element can be prevented from being tilted or excessively displaced. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M9 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, wherein the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  Here, when the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, when the operation element inserted into the operation means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly arranges the operation element). If the operation member that is collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction by inadvertently opening or closing the member in which the container is disposed and pressing the operation member colliding with another member), the operation means is also tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the portion connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operation means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operation means and the object breaks).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers the one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine M9, a gaming machine M10, wherein an outer shape of a base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is made larger than an inner shape of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion. The gap between the cover and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering part or the operating means includes a bulging part formed by bulging, and the other of the covering part or the operating means is Since the receiving portion that receives the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M11, the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are brought into contact with each other, Excessive displacement (in particular, circumferential displacement (rotation)) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M13 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the container includes a standing wall that is erected from an inner surface thereof and a erected tip of which is in contact with the object.

  According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the erected tip abuts against the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the path for entering the inside of the container can be blocked. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which an electronic component is mounted, and a surface on which the electronic component is connected to a circuit of the control board by soldering is a side on which the operation means is disposed. Is set on the opposite surface. A gaming machine M15.

  According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit of the control board by soldering is an operating means. Is set on the surface opposite to the side where the object is disposed, so that the standing tip of the standing wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the standing wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can function reliably as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts, and the foreign object such as a wire can be prevented from being inserted into the container.

  In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced, so that it is brought into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the standing tip, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from between the object and the standing tip. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

  In the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side so that the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall is formed with a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side, so that the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container, improving a moldability. That is, by using a tapered surface, the change in shape can be moderated and the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be secured. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it is difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion projects from two regions.

  According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is one from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting and displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container and to suppress the operating means from dropping from the object.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed at the protruding leading end side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the foreign matter to reach the opening.

  For example, when it is difficult to visually recognize the opening due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire is abutted against the outer surface of the covering portion, and more Can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of a foreign object such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

<About the concept of the invention taking the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the container is formed so as to be able to contact the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element. A gaming machine N1 to play.

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operating element in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens and closes the member provided with the container). When the operating element collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a possibility that the operation means that is displaced (tilted) is damaged (for example, the connecting portion that connects the operation means and the object is disconnected or broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to contact the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. The displacement of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the container is provided with a standing wall that is erected from an inner surface thereof and a erected tip of which comes into contact with the object.

  Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilt) operation means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the container includes a standing wall that is erected from its inner surface and whose erected tip abuts against the object. Becomes a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  At the same time, since the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, the tilting of the operation means can be more reliably suppressed. As a result, breakage of the operating means can be easily suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the standing wall can be prevented from tilting in any direction of the operating means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the path | route for invading into the inside of a container can be interrupted | blocked by a standing wall. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the housing body on which the standing wall is erected, so the rigidity of the housing body , The rigidity of the standing wall can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire container can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) of the standing wall that suppresses deformation of the container when the operation means tilts can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Thus, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers the one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from an outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a streak shape, and one end of the protrusion is A gaming machine N6 that is connected to the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a streak shape. Since one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion, the covering portion can be supported by the protrusion by causing the protrusion to function as a rib. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means, and damage to the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting and displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container and to suppress the operating means from dropping from the object.

  In the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display unit that is formed on an outer surface thereof and displays predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end of the ridge.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display unit that is formed on the outer surface and displays predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end of the ridge. Therefore, the function as an instruction line for pointing to a position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit can also be used as a protrusion. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element into the first surface, whereby the storage The body includes a facing portion that faces the first surface of the operation means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can contact the operation element inserted into the operation means. Machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container is a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, foreign matter such as a wire can be prevented from being inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion.

  In addition, since the edge portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means is tilted) is placed on the edge of the opposite portion. It is possible to prevent the operator from being tilted or excessively displaced by being brought into contact with the portion. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is disposed to face at least a part of a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement locus of the operating element.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is disposed in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign material such as a wire is inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element is inhibited. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the area of the facing portion that comes into contact with the displaced operation element, and to easily suppress an excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operation element. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive displacement of the operation means and to prevent the operation means from dropping from the object.

  In the gaming machine N9, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a first position, and a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the opposing portion are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. The gaming machine N11 is characterized in that the operating element displaced to two positions is in a position where the facing portion comes into contact.

  According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. Since the position where the operation element displaced to the first position or the second position is in contact with the facing part, the position of the operation element displaced to the first position or the second position is applied to the facing part. It can suppress effectively that a facing part and a coating | coated part are damaged when it contacts, using a protrusion.

<Concept of the Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (Operation Wall A210) as an Example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that is formed.

  Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk of fraud in which foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region Since the opening is formed in the housing, the opening can be disposed at a position deeper from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be disposed around the opening. Thereby, it is possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the container. That is, fraud can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O1, at least a part of a connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

  Here, in consideration of heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operation means, the operability is deteriorated. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is easy to ensure the operability of the operation means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's (operator's) hand interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first area and the second area, which hinders the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the operating means may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. In addition to the effect produced by O1, the space connected to the second region can be expanded by the amount of the downward inclination, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O2, the second region is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view in which a length dimension along one direction is larger than a length dimension along another direction orthogonal to the one direction, The gaming machine O3 is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operating element when being inserted into the operating means or pulled out from the operating means is set to the attitude along the other direction. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, the second region is a substantially rectangular region in front view that has a length dimension along one direction larger than a length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when being inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is set to the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surface is opposed, with the surface for gripping the child directed in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the operating element is inserted into the operating means or pulled out from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operating element from interfering with the container. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region extends from the first region to the second. A gaming machine O4 that is inclined downward toward the area.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is the first. Since it is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, it is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripped finger from interfering with the container when the operator is gripped and displaced. For example, when the operator is grasped with the index finger and thumb and the operator is displaced (e.g., rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface, and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, so that the operation is performed by the connecting surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress interference with other members at the time of manufacturing, and to suppress breakage of the operation means. Further, it is difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container.

  In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be increased correspondingly, that is, to cope with heat radiation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. A gaming machine O6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and a connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the short direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped with a finger and operated (inserted into the operating means, pulled out of the operating means, or displaced (for example, rotated)), the gripped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) The open space described above can be used as a space for placing or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, and the other connection surface is the first A gaming machine O7 that is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, Since the connection surface is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, a container for accommodating heat radiation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of tilting the connection surface downward The volume of the interior space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize a decrease in the volume of the internal space of the container by tilting the connection surface downward.

  The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the housing body is disposed, and a rotation shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and a longitudinal direction in the second region is an axial direction of the rotation shaft. The transverse direction is substantially orthogonal and the transverse direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is disposed on a side farther from the rotating shaft than the other side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 includes a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotary shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and is long in the second region. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotary shaft, the short side direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotary shaft, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is disposed on the side farther from the rotary axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the operation means is operated in a space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface can be effectively used. That is, a space for allowing the operator's (operator's) hand to access the operation means can be secured by the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a container for housing an object, comprising: a display device disposed in a game area; and an operation unit disposed on the object and configured to be operable, and relates to operation of the operation unit A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operation state of the operation means when the operation means is arranged on the control board (object).

  According to the gaming machine P1, the display device disposed in the game area and the operation means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable are provided, and information relating to operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display on the display device. Further, since the display means is arranged in the game area, the display means can be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the container is formed so as to be displaceable. Therefore, the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while confirming the display (information), the operability can be improved and an operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state in which the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), it is possible to suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine P2, the game machine is characterized in that the game machine can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the game machine is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. Therefore, the operation of operating the operation means can be facilitated while confirming the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of operation errors can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on a side farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the container.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on the side farther from the position where the operation is supported than the center of the container. In a state where the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed, the operation means is positioned farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Can be placed. Therefore, it can suppress that the finger which operates an operation means interferes with the outer edge of a game machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the operating means includes a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is located farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5, which is arranged in

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is more effective than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the pivotally supported position, the operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency, it is possible to prevent fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a container for accommodating a target object, the game machine includes operation means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable, and the target object is connected with one or more electrical connection lines, The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to a connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is disposed on the control board (object), there is room for improvement as to whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if the operation is permitted regardless of the connection state of the one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operation means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of the one or more electrical connection lines is likely to occur. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work accompanying the operation of the operation means may be deteriorated.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, it is provided with operation means that is disposed on the object and is configured to be operable, and the object is connected to one or more electrical connection lines, and the connection of the electrical connection line to the object Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed so as to be displaceable, the gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so that the container can be disposed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state in which the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (unplugged) from the object, so that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is connected to the object, the operation means is allowed to be operated. Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in the state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is connected, the operation of the operating means is allowed. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. In other words, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if other electrical connection lines are released (unplugged) from the object, By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

  In particular, in a configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line that is released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to be arranged to be easily operated) In order to allow the operation of the operating means after displacing, for example, another electrical connection line released (removed) by inserting an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line The trouble of reconnecting to the object can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation of the operating means is prohibited when at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object. Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object (that is, all electrical connections) If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that the operation means can be prevented from being illegally operated.

In the configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line that is released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange for easy operation) For example, if an extension line is interposed between the object and another electrical connection line and another electrical connection line that has been released (removed) is reconnected to the object, the operation is performed. Since the operation of the means can be permitted, the operation by the operation of the operation means can be performed. <About the concept of the invention taking the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with a container for accommodating a target object, comprising an operating means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable and disposed at the time of a game. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means is easier to operate than the position.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operation means is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, it is provided with an operating means that is disposed on an object and configured to be operable, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than a position that is disposed at the time of gaming. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the container is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable, and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the container is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, a gaming machine R3, wherein a separate member faces the operation means at a position where the container is disposed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1 or R2, the container is operated in an unauthorized manner because another member faces the operating means at the position where the container is disposed during the game. This can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element. In the state where the operation element is inserted, the operation element is brought into contact with the separate member, A gaming machine R4, wherein the container cannot be displaced to a position where it is disposed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element hits another member. By contacting, the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is arranged at the time of the game, so that it is possible to suppress forgetting to remove the operator. Therefore, it can suppress that an operator is used illegally.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 The gaming machine X1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 The gaming machine X2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 Any of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine X3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (part of area composition means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Special prize opening (part of profit granting means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow method)
152 1st receiving flow path (1st structure part, 2nd structure part)
153 Second receiving flow path member (second component)
154 Projection (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 Horizontally mounted substrate unit (predetermined substrate)
170 Decoration means (placement means)
171a Horizontally long groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflecting shape (direction changing means)
180 Displacement restriction device (limitation means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guide means)
183 Operation member (operation part)
183f engaging portion 184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 partition member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-like means)
312 Curved plate (first guide)
314 Lower back section (second guide)
315 Profile penetration (opening)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 Shaft (Regulator)
410 Linear motion member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protrusion (second contact part)
414 Projection (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Buffer member (second contact part)
430 Contact member (part of displacement means, first member, restriction means)
432 Projection part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, discrimination participating means)
446 transmission protrusion (first transmission portion, contact portion)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of action means, contact means, advance / retreat means)
482 Overhang (representative tip)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Rear case (part of area construction means)
630 Lower arm member (part of operating means)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Production member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b First guided protrusion (first loaded part)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of first member, part of second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylinder protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electric wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of the flow down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (Rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch device (operating means)
A122 Operation part (operator)
A123b Protrusion (first surface)
A130 Key device (operation means)
A133b Protrusion (receiving part)
A133c End (first surface)
A140 Key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposite part)
A211 first ridge (projection)
A212 Second ridge (projection)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering part A271 Surrounding wall part (covering part)
A271a Base (cover)
A271b Protrusion (bulging part)
A272, A2272 End face wall (covering part, facing part)
A272a Torus (opposite part)
A272b Square part (opposite part)
A2273 ridge (projection)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 Box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine equipped with a container for containing an object,
An operation means disposed on the object and configured to be operable,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the container is formed to be displaceable, and is displaceable to a position where the operation means is easier to operate than a position at the time of game.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the container is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable, and the container is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein another member faces the operation means at a position where the container is disposed during the game.

Images